From e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Norbert Preining Date: Mon, 2 Sep 2019 13:46:59 +0900 Subject: Initial commit --- macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/README | 5 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.dtx | 1397 ++++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.ins | 110 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf | Bin 0 -> 446965 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1772 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.pdf | Bin 0 -> 81871 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.tex | 37 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/read.me | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svactinf.clo | 73 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/template.tex | 137 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 7508 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.tex | 195 + .../springer/svjour/agp/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 72068 bytes .../springer/svjour/agp/example/example.tex | 1277 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.dtx | 3221 +++++++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.ins | 57 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/read.me | 32 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/svagp.clo | 333 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/template.tex | 136 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.dvi | Bin 0 -> 5272 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.pdf | Bin 0 -> 45785 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.ps | 2932 ++++++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.tex | 95 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 23540 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.pdf | Bin 0 -> 42234 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.ps | 7363 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.tex | 331 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/readme.txt | 32 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/svamalog.clo | 268 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/template.tex | 141 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/totalin.aml | 65 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/arma/armaguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 3380 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/arma/armaguid.tex | 70 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/history.txt | 9 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/readme.txt | 30 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/svarma.clo | 251 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/arma/template.tex | 133 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/arma/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/arma/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2360 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.ps | 2193 ++++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.tex | 48 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/readme.txt | 21 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/svcalco.clo | 133 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/template.tex | 135 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/cmpguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2512 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/cmpguid.tex | 51 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 60828 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/example.tex | 1148 +++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/read.me | 26 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/svcmp.clo | 247 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/template.tex | 127 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/cvsguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1984 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/cvsguid.tex | 42 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 34852 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/example.tex | 647 ++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/read.me | 26 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/svcvs.clo | 76 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/template.tex | 136 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/dcguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2264 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/dcguide.tex | 98 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/layout.dvi | Bin 0 -> 46120 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/layout.tex | 860 +++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/read.me | 23 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/svdc.clo | 147 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2788 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.pdf | Bin 0 -> 38351 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.tex | 54 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/readme.txt | 20 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/svdef.clo | 137 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/template.tex | 140 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/epj.dvi | Bin 0 -> 6944 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/epj.pdf | Bin 0 -> 47851 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/read.me | 33 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/svepj.clo | 308 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/template.tex | 139 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/global.dvi | Bin 0 -> 3540 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/global.tex | 66 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/read.me | 37 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/svglobal.clo | 79 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/template.tex | 146 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/global/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../springer/svjour/granma/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 34332 bytes .../springer/svjour/granma/example/example.tex | 480 ++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/grmguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2272 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/grmguide.tex | 98 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/read.me | 31 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/svgranma.clo | 220 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/template.tex | 135 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/granma/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 96108 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/example.tex | 1444 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/ijdargui.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2376 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/ijdargui.tex | 101 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/read.me | 25 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/svijdar.clo | 144 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/template.tex | 136 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1852 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.pdf | Bin 0 -> 83613 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.tex | 89 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/iodlgui.ps | 1854 +++++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/read.me | 22 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/svijodl.clo | 183 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/template.tex | 136 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/invmat.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1788 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/invmat.pdf | Bin 0 -> 38653 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/readme.txt | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/svinvmat.clo | 71 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/template.tex | 137 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../springer/svjour/jog/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 64732 bytes .../springer/svjour/jog/example/example.tex | 972 +++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/jogguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 7476 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/jogguide.tex | 195 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/natbib.dtx | 3221 +++++++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/natbib.ins | 57 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/read.me | 32 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/svjog.clo | 394 ++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/template.tex | 142 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/history.txt | 48 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.dvi | Bin 0 -> 4860 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.pdf | Bin 0 -> 121134 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.tex | 85 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/read.me | 21 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/svmanmat.clo | 246 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/template.tex | 135 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/matann.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2448 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/matann.pdf | Bin 0 -> 48483 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/read.me | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/svmatann.clo | 70 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/template.tex | 137 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matann/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 5276 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.pdf | Bin 0 -> 46266 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.tex | 95 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/readme.txt | 32 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/svmatbio.clo | 264 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/template.tex | 141 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.dvi | Bin 0 -> 4924 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.pdf | Bin 0 -> 122400 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.ps | 2710 +++++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.tex | 85 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/read.me | 22 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/svmatprg.clo | 245 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/template.tex | 129 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/matlog.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2412 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/matlog.pdf | Bin 0 -> 48942 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/read.me | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/svmatlog.clo | 84 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/template.tex | 139 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/matzei.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1788 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/matzei.pdf | Bin 0 -> 39402 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/read.me | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/svmatzei.clo | 66 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/template.tex | 137 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/nummat.dvi | Bin 0 -> 2388 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/nummat.pdf | Bin 0 -> 48496 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/read.me | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/svnummat.clo | 73 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/template.tex | 137 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 4508 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.pdf | Bin 0 -> 44844 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.tex | 80 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/readme.txt | 33 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/svprobth.clo | 255 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/template.tex | 139 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/readme.1st | 70 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/read.me | 22 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1800 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.pdf | Bin 0 -> 83932 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.ps | 1864 +++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.tex | 89 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/svsct.clo | 194 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/template.tex | 136 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 64928 bytes .../springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.pdf | Bin 0 -> 72853 bytes .../springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.tex | 1210 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/natbib.dtx | 3221 +++++++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/natbib.ins | 57 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/readme.txt | 38 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/stroptgd.dvi | Bin 0 -> 7696 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/stroptgd.tex | 199 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/svstropt.clo | 250 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/template.tex | 144 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/read.me | 22 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.dvi | Bin 0 -> 1844 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.pdf | Bin 0 -> 82899 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.tex | 89 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/svsttt.clo | 195 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/template.tex | 136 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/sw/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 35688 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/sw/example/example.tex | 601 ++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/read.me | 31 + macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/svsw.clo | 351 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/swguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 4080 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/swguide.tex | 124 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/template.tex | 135 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes .../springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.dvi | Bin 0 -> 73768 bytes .../springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.pdf | Bin 0 -> 121856 bytes .../springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.sty | 173 + .../springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.tex | 1172 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/natbib.dtx | 4464 ++++++++++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/natbib.ins | 109 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/readme.txt | 33 + .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/svjour.cls | 1236 ++++ .../latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/svtcfd.clo | 335 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 10720 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 62112 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.tex | 251 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/template.tex | 139 + .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/usrguide.dvi | Bin 0 -> 28500 bytes .../contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/usrguide.pdf | Bin 0 -> 197756 bytes 293 files changed, 95132 insertions(+) create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/README create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svactinf.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/svagp.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/amalogui.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/svamalog.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/totalin.aml create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/amalog/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/armaguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/armaguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/history.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/svarma.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/arma/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/calcolo.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/svcalco.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/calcolo/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/cmpguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/cmpguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/svcmp.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cmp/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/cvsguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/cvsguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/svcvs.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/cvs/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/dcguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/dcguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/layout.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/layout.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/svdc.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/dc/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/guidedef.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/svdef.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/def/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/epj.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/epj.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/svepj.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/epj/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/global.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/global.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/svglobal.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/global/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/grmguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/grmguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/svgranma.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/granma/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/ijdargui.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/ijdargui.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/svijdar.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijdar/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/ijodlgui.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/iodlgui.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/svijodl.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/ijodl/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/invmat.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/invmat.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/svinvmat.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/invmat/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/jogguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/jogguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/natbib.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/natbib.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/svjog.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/jog/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/history.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/kernel/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/manmat.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/svmanmat.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/manmat/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/matann.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/matann.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/svmatann.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matann/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/mbioguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/svmatbio.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matbio/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/mathprog.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/svmatprg.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/mathprog/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/matlog.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/matlog.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/svmatlog.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matlog/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/matzei.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/matzei.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/svmatzei.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/matzei/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/nummat.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/nummat.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/svnummat.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/nummat/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/ptrfguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/svprobth.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/prothe/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/readme.1st create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.ps create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/sctguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/svsct.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sct/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/natbib.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/natbib.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/stroptgd.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/stroptgd.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/svstropt.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/stropt/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/stttguid.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/svsttt.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sttt/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/read.me create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/svsw.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/swguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/swguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/sw/usrguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.sty create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/example/example.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/natbib.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/natbib.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/readme.txt create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/svjour.cls create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/svtcfd.clo create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/tcfdguide.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/template.tex create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/usrguide.dvi create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/tcfd/usrguide.pdf (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/springer') diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/README b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e8223c04d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/README @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +This LaTeX class provides a template for books to be published at Springer Gabler Research, Springer Vieweg Research, Springer Spektrum Research, Springer VS Research or Springer VS Forschung. It can be used to produce monographs in different formats and "several-authors-books" fitting the conditions of the aforementioned publishers. + +You find the class documentation in file sr-vorl.pdf. The source code can be found in sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins. By compiling sr-vorl.dtx with pdflatex, you get the documentation, while compiling sr-vorl.ins gives you the cls-file and the template files frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex and hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. + +All of this ma­te­rial is sub­ject to the LaTeX Project Public Li­cense. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1520cceda --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,1397 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2013-2016 by Jonas L. Dabelow +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public License, +% entweder Version 1.3c oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) jeder spaeteren Version, +% verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz ist: +% +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status "author-maintained" (vom Autor betreut). +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den Dateien sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +% and the derived files sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +% mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex und hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. +% +% +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in: +% +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% This work consists of the files sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +% and the derived files sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +% mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex and hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. +% +% +%<*driver> + \ProvidesFile{sr-vorl.dtx} +% +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +%\ProvidesClass{sr-vorl} +%<*class> + [2016/01/30 v1.1 Vorlage fuer Autoren bei Springer Research] +% +% +%<*driver> +% +\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} +\usepackage{lmodern} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[british,ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage{etoolbox} +\newtoggle{auxdatei} +\IfFileExists{\jobname.aux}% Abfrage zur Vermeidung von biber-Fehlern beim ersten Durchlauf + {\global\toggletrue{auxdatei}} + {\global\togglefalse{auxdatei}} +\iftoggle{auxdatei} + {\usepackage[sortcites=true,maxnames=5,backref=true,backend=biber,maxnames=10]{biblatex}} + {} +\usepackage{ragged2e} +\usepackage[german=quotes,autostyle=true]{csquotes} +\usepackage{microtype} +\usepackage{filecontents} +\usepackage{scrextend} +\usepackage{doc} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage[german]{cleveref} + + +\hypersetup{% + colorlinks=true, + bookmarksnumbered=true, + bookmarksopen=true, + pdftoolbar=true, + pdfmenubar=true, + pdffitwindow=true, + pdfdisplaydoctitle=true, + pdflang=ngerman, + pdfcenterwindow=true, + pdfpagelayout=SinglePage, + pdftitle={Vorlage für Springer Research und Springer VS - Dokumentation}, + pdfsubject={Vorlage für Springer Research und Springer VS}, + pdfkeywords={LaTeX, Springer Research, Springer VS, Vorlage, Template, Klasse}, + pdfauthor={Jonas L. Dabelow}, + pdfcreator={TeXMaker mit TeXLive}, + linkcolor=blue, + urlcolor=red, +} + + +\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% Umgebungsname im Fließtext (ohne Verlinkung) +\newcommand{\fmacro}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash{}#1}}% Makro im Fliesstext (ohne Verlinkung) +\newcommand{\farg}[1]{\ensuremath{\langle}\textit{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}% freies Argument (ohne Klammern) +\newcommand{\sarg}[1]{\texttt{\{#1\}}}% spezielles Argument in geschweiften Klammern (kein Meta-Argument!) +\newcommand{\soarg}[1]{\texttt{[#1]}}% spezielles optionales Argument in geschweiften Klammern (kein Meta-Argument!) +\newcommand{\macropar}{\par\medskip}% Absatz nach jedem Makro +\newcommand{\descriptionpar}{\par\smallskip}% Absatz nach \macrodescription +\newcommand{\datei}[1]{\textit{#1}}% setzt einen Dateinamen +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% setzt einen Optionsnamen +\newcommand{\programm}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% setzt einen Programmnamen (z. B. pdflatex) + + + + +\newcommand{\envdescription}[2][]{% Beschreibung einer Umgebung (mit automatischer Verlinkung) + \DescribeMacro{#2-\textrm{Umgebung}}% + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hypertarget{env:#2}{}}% + {\hypertarget{env:#1}{}}% +} + + +\newcommand{\macrodescription}[2][]{% Beschreibung eines Makros (mit automatischer Verlinkung) + {% + \def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{\strut \MacroFont \textbackslash#1}% + \DescribeMacro{#2}% + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hypertarget{macro:#2}{}}% + {\hypertarget{macro:#1}{}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\optdescription}[2][]{% Beschreibung einer Option (mit automatischer Verlinkung) + \DescribeMacro{#2}% + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hypertarget{option:#2}{}}% + {\hypertarget{option:#1}{}}% +} + +\newcommand{\macroref}[2][]{% Referenzierung auf ein Makro + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hyperlink{macro:#2}{\fmacro{#2}}}% + {\hyperlink{macro:#2}{#1}}% +} + +\newcommand{\envref}[2][]{% Referenzierung auf eine Umgebung + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hyperlink{env:#2}{\env{#2}}}% + {\hyperlink{env:#2}{#1}}% +} + +\newcommand{\optref}[2][]{% Referenzierung auf eine Umgebung + \ifblank{#1}% + {\hyperlink{option:#2}{\env{#2}}}% + {\hyperlink{option:#2}{#1}}% +} + +\newcommand{\counter}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% Beschreibung eines Counters + +\newcommand{\paket}[2][]{% Paketnamen setzen (opt. Arg. kann Link auf Doku enthalten) + \ifblank{#1}% + {\texttt{#2}}% + {\href{#1}{\texttt{#2}}}% +} + +% #1: Versionsnummer +% #2: was wurde geaendert? +% #3: Kommentar +\newcommand{\aenderung}[3]{% Aenderung fuer Liste der Aenderungen + \item[#2~(Version #1)]~\\ + #3% +} + +\setlength{\parindent}{1em} + +\iftoggle{auxdatei} + {% + \defbibnote{literatur}{% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Literatur}% + Die meisten Einträge in diesem Literaturverzeichnis verweisen auf \LaTeX-Pakete. + Bitte beachten Sie, dass je nach Version der Pakete das Verhalten auf Ihrem Rechner von dem in den Dokumentationen beschriebenen leicht abweichen kann oder in der Dokumentation beschriebene Befehle auf Ihrem System (noch) nicht verfügbar sein können.\par + Soweit möglich sind für englische Text hier die deutschen Übersetzungen aufgeführt. + In einigen Fällen kann es passieren, dass die Übersetzung nicht die aktuellste Version wiedergibt. + } + } + {} + +\begin{filecontents}{sr-vorl.bib} + @Book{latex-begleiter, + author = {F. Mittelbach and M. Goossens and J. Braams and D. Carlisle and C. Rowley}, + title = {Der \LaTeX Begleiter}, + publisher = {Pearson Studium}, + address = {München}, + edition = {2.~Auf"|lage}, + year = {2005}, + } + + @online{l2tabu, + author = {M. Ensenbach and M. Trettin}, + title = {Das \LaTeX2$_\varepsilon$-Sündenregister}, + year = {2011}, + url = {http://ftp.fernuni-hagen.de/ftp-dir/pub/mirrors/www.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/german/l2tabu.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{l2kurz, + author = {M. Daniel and P. Gundlach and W. Schmidt and J. Knappen and H. Partl and I. Hyna}, + title = {\LaTeX2$_\varepsilon$-Kurzbeschreibung}, + year = {2013}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/info/lshort/german/l2kurz.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @Book{koma, + author = {M. Kohm}, + title = {\textsf{KOMA}-Script}, + publisher = {Lehmanns Media}, + year = {2014}, + edition = {5.~Auf"|lage}, + address = {Berlin}, + url = {ftp://ftp.tu-chemnitz.de/pub/tex/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{ctan, + author = {}, + title = {Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, + year = {1993}, + url = {http://www.ctan.org/}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{caption, + author = {A. Sommerfeldt}, + title = {Anpassen der Abbildungs- und Tabellenbeschriftungen}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/tex/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{geometry, + author = {H. Umeki}, + translator = {H.-M. Haase}, + title = {Das \paket{geometry} Paket}, + year = {2010}, + url = {http://ftp.fernuni-hagen.de/ftp-dir/pub/mirrors/www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/geometry-de/geometry-de.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{enumitem, + author = {J. Bezos}, + translator = {M. Ludwig and C. Römer}, + title = {Anpassen von Listen mit dem Paket \paket{enumitem}}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.mpi-sb.mpg.de/pub/tex/mirror/ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/info/translations/enumitem/de/enumitem-de.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{amsldoc, + author = {American Mathematical Society}, + title = {User's Guide for the \paket{amsmath} Package}, + year = {2002}, + url = {ftp://ftp.mpi-sb.mpg.de/pub/tex/mirror/ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{wikibooks-floats, + author = {Wikibooks}, + title = {\LaTeX/Floats, Figures and Captions}, + url = {http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX/Floats,_Figures_and_Captions}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{float, + author = {A. Lingnau}, + title = {An Improved Environment for Floats}, + year = {2001}, + url = {http://ftp.fau.de/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/float/float.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @Book{texbook, + author = {D. E. Knuth}, + title = {The \TeX book}, + publisher = {American Mathematical Society}, + year = {1989}, + edition = {9.~Auf"|lage}, + } + + @online{rotating, + author = {R. Fairbairns and S. Rahtz and L. Barroca}, + title = {A package for rotated objects in \LaTeX}, + year = {2010}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/rotating/rotating.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @Book{voss-mathe, + author = {H. Voß}, + title = {Mathematiksatz mit \LaTeX}, + publisher = {Lehmanns Media}, + year = {2009}, + address = {Berlin}, + edition = {1.~Auf"|lage}, + } + + @online{voss-mathe-online, + author = {H. Voß}, + title = {Math Mode}, + year = {2014}, + url = {http://sunsite.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/ftp/pub/mirror/ctan/info/math/voss/mathmode/Mathmode.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{microtype, + author = {R. Schlicht}, + title = {Das \paket{microtype} Paket}, + url = {http://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/ctan/info/translations/microtype/de/microtype-DE.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{babel, + author = {J. Braams and J. Bezos}, + title = {Babel}, + year = {2016}, + url = {ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/tex/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/base/babel.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{onlyamsmath, + author = {H. Harders}, + title = {The \paket{onlyamsmath} package}, + year = {2012}, + url = {http://ftp.fau.de/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/onlyamsmath/onlyamsmath.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{wikibooks-silbentrennung, + author = {Wikibooks}, + title = {\LaTeX-Wörterbuch: Silbentrennung}, + url = {http://de.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX-Wörterbuch:_Silbentrennung}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{wikibooks-latex, + author = {Wikibooks}, + title = {\LaTeX}, + url = {http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{booktabs, + author = {S. Fear}, + translator = {T. Manderla and C. Römer}, + title = {Anfertigen von hochwertigen Tabellen mit \LaTeX}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs-de/booktabs-de.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{csquotes, + author = {P. Lehman}, + translator = {T. Conrad and P. Faßbender and C. Römer}, + title = {Das \paket{csquotes}-Paket}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/info/translations/csquotes/de/csquotes-DE.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{cleveref, + author = {T. Cubitt}, + title = {The \paket{cleveref} package}, + year = {2013}, + url = {http://ftp.uni-erlangen.de/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/cleveref/cleveref.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{varioref, + author = {F. Mittelbach}, + title = {The \paket{varioref} package}, + year = {2015}, + url = {http://sunsite.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/ftp/pub/mirror/ctan/macros/latex/required/tools/varioref.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{siunitx, + author = {J. Wright}, + title = {\paket{siunitx} --~A comprehensive (SI) units package}, + year = {2016}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/siunitx.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{etoolbox, + author = {P. Lehman}, + translator = {T. Enderling}, + title = {Das Paket \paket{etoolbox}}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/tex/CTAN/info/translations/etoolbox/de/etoolbox-DE.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{ragged2e, + author = {M. Schröder}, + title = {The \paket{ragged2e}-package}, + year = {2009}, + url = {http://ftp.fernuni-hagen.de/ftp-dir/pub/mirrors/www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ms/ragged2e.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{juergens1, + author = {M. Jürgens}, + title = {\LaTeX\ --~eine Einführung und ein bisschen mehr\dots}, + year = {2000}, + url = {http://www.wiwiss.fu-berlin.de/fachbereich/vwl/iso/links/latex_einfuehrung_manuela_juergens.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{juergens2, + author = {M. Jürgens}, + title = {\LaTeX\ --~Fortgeschrittene Anwendungen}, + year = {1995}, + url = {ftp://ftp.fernuni-hagen.de/pub/pdf/urz-broschueren/broschueren/a0279510.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{buxbaum-presentation, + author = {E. Buxbaum}, + title = {The \LaTeX\ document preparation system}, + year = {2008}, + url = {ftp://ftp.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/pub/mirror/tex-archive/info/latex-course/LaTeX-Course.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{simplified-introduction, + author = {H. J. Greenberg}, + title = {A Simplified Introduction to \LaTeX}, + year = {2010}, + url = {http://sunsite.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/ftp/pub/mirror/ctan/info/simplified-latex/simplified-intro.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{beginners-introduction, + author = {P. Flynn}, + title = {A beginner's introduction to typesetting with \LaTeX}, + year = {2005}, + url = {http://sunsite.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/ftp/pub/mirror/ctan/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @Book{more-math, + author = {G. Grätzer}, + title = {More Math Into \LaTeX}, + publisher = {Springer}, + year = {2007}, + address = {New York}, + edition = {4.~Auf"|lage}, + url = {http://ctan.space-pro.be/tex-archive/info/Math_into_LaTeX-4/Short_Course.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{xkeyval, + author = {H. Adriaens}, + title = {The \paket{xkeyval} package}, + year = {2014}, + url = {http://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/xkeyval/xkeyval.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{xstring, + author = {C. Tellechea}, + title = {\paket{xstring}}, + year = {2013}, + url = {http://sunsite.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/ftp/pub/mirror/ctan/macros/generic/xstring/xstring_doc_en.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{varwidth, + author = {D. Arseneau}, + title = {The \paket{varwidth} package}, + year = {2011}, + url = {ftp://ftp.mpi-sb.mpg.de/pub/tex/mirror/ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/macros/latex/contrib/varwidth/varwidth-doc.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } + + @online{chngcntr, + author = {P. Wilson}, + title = {The \paket{chngcntr} package}, + year = {2009}, + url = {http://ctan.space-pro.be/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/chngcntr/chngcntr.pdf}, + urldate = {2016-01-30}, + } +\end{filecontents} + +\iftoggle{auxdatei} + {\addbibresource{sr-vorl.bib}} + {} + +\clubpenalty=10000 +\widowpenalty=10000 + +\DisableCrossrefs +%\CodelineIndex +\RecordChanges +\OnlyDescription +\begin{document} + + +\title{sr-vorl.cls\\[1ex]\normalsize Eine \LaTeX-Klasse für Bücher bei Springer Research (Springer Gabler Research, Springer Vieweg Research, Springer Spektrum Research) und Springer VS (Springer VS Research, Springer VS Forschung) +} +\author{Copyright 2013--2016 by Jonas~L.~Dabelow\footnote{\href{mailto:J.L.Dabelow@gmx.net}{\texttt{J.L.Dabelow@gmx.net}}}} +\date{Version~1.1 (31.\,Januar~2016)} +\maketitle + + +\pdfbookmark[1]{Inhaltsverzeichnis}{tableofcontents} +\tableofcontents +\newpage +\DocInput{sr-vorl.dtx} + +\end{document} + +% +%\fi +% +% +%\GetFileInfo{sr-vorl.dtx} +% +% +% \section{Einleitung} +% Diese \LaTeX-Klasse wurde erstellt, um Bücher zu setzen, die bei Springer Research (\textbf{Springer Gabler Research}, \textbf{Springer Vieweg Research}, \textbf{Springer Spektrum Research}) oder Springer~VS (\textbf{Springer VS Research}, \textbf{Springer VS Forschung}) veröffentlicht werden sollen (Beachte hierzu auch die Klassenoption \optref{format}!). +% Mit dieser Klasse werden viele Gestaltungsvorgaben des Verlags bereits umgesetzt. +% Der Autor der Klasse gibt jedoch keine Garantie, dass damit alle Vorgaben bereits umgesetzt sind. +% Dies ist in einigen Fällen auch nicht möglich, da die Autoren eines Buches einige Dinge \enquote{von Hand} umsetzen müssen, da \LaTeX\ hierfür keine vollständige Automatisierung ermöglicht (z.\,B. Silbentrennung, Platzierung von Gleitobjekten\dots). +% In den meisten Fällen ist der Autor dieser Klasse jedoch bemüht, hilfreiche Hinweise zu geben, wie eine solche händische Umsetzung sinnvoll erfolgen kann (siehe \cref{sec:hinweise}).\par +% In dieser Dokumenation werden zunächst in \cref{sec:befehle} die Befehle und Umgebungen vorgestellt, die diese Klasse bereitstellt. +% In \cref{sec:optionen} werden die Einstellungen gezeigt, die mit Hilfe von Klassenoptionen vorgenommen werden können. +% Weiterführende Hinweise zur Umsetzung der Gestaltungsvorgaben werden in \cref{sec:hinweise} gegeben. +% Weiterführende Informationen zu dieser Dokumentenklasse sowie weitere Tipps und Hinweise finden sich in \cref{sec:weiterfuehrendes}. +% In \cref{sec:lizenz} finden Sie zudem die Lizenz, unter der diese Dokumentation, die zugehörige Klasse und alle weiteren dazu gehörenden Dateien stehen.\par +% Dieses Dokument ist keine Einführung in \LaTeX! +% Es werden grundlegende \LaTeX-Kenntnisse vorausgesetzt (siehe auch \cref{sec:literaturtipps}).\par +% Da diese \LaTeX-Klasse noch in der Entwicklung ist, freut sich der Autor grundsätzlich über Hinweise, Fehlerreports und Feature-Anfragen (unabhängig davon, ob er sie umsetzt oder nicht). +% +% +% \subsection{Nutzung der Klasse} +% Sie können diese Klasse wie jede andere \LaTeX-Klasse auch nutzen. +% Binden Sie sie einfach mit dem Befehl \fmacro{documentclass}\oarg{Optionen}\sarg{sr-vorl} ein. +% Dazu muss die Datei \datei{sr-vorl.cls} in einem Ordner liegen, der von \LaTeX\ durchsucht wird (z.\,B. der Ordner, in dem sich Ihre Hauptdatei befindet).\par +% Sie können zusätzlich entweder die bereitgestellten Dateien \datei{hauptdatei\_sr-vorl.tex}, \datei{frontmatter\_sr-vorl.tex} (für den Vorspann), \datei{mainmatter\_sr-vorl.tex} (für den Inhalt) und \datei{backmatter\_sr-vorl.tex} (für den Anhang) verwenden oder die Klasse in Verbindung mit Ihren eigenen Dateien nutzen. +% In diesem Fall sollten Sie zur Gliederung des Dokuments auch die \textsf{KOMA}-Script-Befehle \fmacro{frontmatter}, \fmacro{mainmatter} und \fmacro{backmatter} für Vorspann, Hauptteil und Nachspann Ihres Dokuments verwenden \cite{koma}, da diese Befehle wichtige Funktionen erfüllen (z.\,B. Umschalten der Seitennummerierung).\par +% Sollten Sie keine der genannten Dateien haben, sondern lediglich die Dateien \datei{sr-vorl.dtx} und \datei{sr-vorl.ins}, ist dies kein Problem. +% Sie müssen lediglich die Datei \datei{sr-vorl.ins} mit \programm{tex}, \programm{latex} oder \programm{pdflatex} kompilieren, um die erwähnten Dateien zu erzeugen (siehe \cref{sec:erzeugung}).\par +% Diese Klasse wurde für den Einsatz mit \programm{pdflatex} optimiert. +% Sie ist prinzipiell auch mit \programm{latex} nutzbar (beachte dazu auch \cref{sec:querformat}), der Autor empfiehlt aber dringend den Einsatz von \programm{pdflatex}. +% Die Nutzung mit anderen Treibern wie \programm{xetex}, \programm{luatex} oder \programm{context} ist nicht getestet! +% +% \subsection{Erzeugung der Klassendatei und Hilfsdateien sowie der Dokumentation (falls notwendig)} +% \label{sec:erzeugung} +% Die vorliegende Klasse inklusive aller zugehörigen Dateien kann --~wie üblicherweise jede \LaTeX-Klasse~-- aus einer \datei{.dtx}- und einer \datei{.ins}-Datei erzeugt werden.\par +% Sofern Sie keinen Zugriff auf die Klassendatei \datei{sr-vorl.cls}, aber auf die Dateien \datei{sr-vorl.dtx} und \datei{sr-vorl.ins} haben, können Sie die Klassendatei erzeugen, indem Sie \datei{sr-vorl.ins} mit \programm{tex}, \programm{latex} oder \programm{pdflatex} kompilieren:\\ +% \texttt{tex sr-vorl.ins}\\ +% oder\\ +% \texttt{latex sr-vorl.ins}\\ +% oder\\ +% \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.ins}\\ +% Durch einen (beliebigen) dieser Aufrufe werden die Dateien \datei{sr-vorl.cls}, \datei{frontmatter\_sr-vorl.tex}, \datei{mainmatter\_sr-vorl.tex}, \datei{backmatter\_sr-vorl.tex} und \datei{hauptdatei\_sr-vorl.tex} erzeugt.\par +% Um diese Dokumentation zu erzeugen, müssen Sie die Datei \datei{sr-vorl.dtx} mit \programm{pdflatex} kompilieren: \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.dtx}\\ +% Für die vollständige Dokumentation benötigen Sie auch \programm{biber}. +% Es ergibt sich zur Erzeugung der vollständigen Dokumentation der folgende Ablauf:\\ +% \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.dtx}\\ +% \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.dtx}\\ +% \texttt{biber sr-vorl.bcf}\\ +% \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.dtx}\\ +% \texttt{pdflatex sr-vorl.dtx}\par +% Um \datei{sr-vorl.dtx} kompilieren zu können, müssen die Klasse \paket{ltxdoc} sowie die folgenden Pakete auf Ihrem System verfügbar sein: \paket{lmodern}, \paket{fontenc}, \paket{inputenc}, \paket{babel}, \paket{etoolbox}, \paket{biblatex}, \paket{ragged2e}, \paket{csquotes}, \paket{microtype}, \paket{filecontents}, \paket{scrextend}, \paket{doc}, \paket{hyperref}, \paket{cleveref}. +% +% \section{Befehle und Umgebungen} +% \label{sec:befehle} +% Diese Klasse basiert auf der Klasse \paket{scrbook} aus dem \textsf{KOMA}-Script-Bündel \cite{koma}. +% Alle Befehle und Umgebungen, die von \textsf{KOMA}-Script bereit gestellt werden, können hier genutzt werden.\par +% Zusätzlich sind einige hilfreiche Befehle und Umgebungen in dieser Klasse implementiert worden.\par\bigskip +% +% \subsection{Der Vorspann} +% \label{sec:vorspann} +% \noindent\envdescription{widmung}\texttt{\fmacro{begin}\{widmung\}}\oarg{Überschrift}\texttt{\dots}\descriptionpar +% In dieser Umgebung wird die Widmung gesetzt. +% Sie wird rechtsbündig, in kursiver Schrift auf eine rechte Seite gesetzt. +% Vertikal ist sie so ausgerichtet, dass das Verhältnis von oberem und unterem Abstand den Goldenen Schnitt bildet.\par +% Als optionales Argument kann eine Überschrift angegeben werden (die ebenfalls rechtsbündig gesetzt wird). +% Wir kein optionales Argument angegeben, so erhält die Widmung keine Überschrift.\macropar +% +% \pagebreak +% \macrodescription{geleitwort}% +% Dieser Befehl setzt lediglich die Überschrift \enquote{Geleitwort}. +% Die Sprache der Überschrift wird anhand der gewählten Klassenoption ausgewählt (siehe \cref{sec:optionen}). +% Die Überschrift kann verändert werden, indem der Befehl \fmacro{GeleitwortTitel} umdefiniert wird. +% Dies muss nach der Präambel gemacht werden.\macropar +% +% \noindent\macrodescription{verfasser}\oarg{Ortbreite, Namebreite}\marg{Ort}\marg{Name}\descriptionpar +% Mit diesem Befehl wird am Ende des Geleitwortes der Verfasser desselben sowie der Ort, an dem es geschrieben wurde, gesetzt. +% Der Befehl steht direkt hinter dem Geleitwort, ein vertikaler Abstand wird automatisch eingefügt. +% Der Ort wird linksbündig nach links gesetzt, der Verfasser rechtsbündig nach rechts.\par +% Dabei ist die Breite des Ortes standardmäßig bis zu 40\,\% der Zeilenbreite, die des Verfassers bis zu 50\,\% der Zeilenbreite. +% Dies kann mit Hilfe des optionalen Arguments geändert werden. +% Hier müssen beide Längen durch ein Komma getrennt angegeben werden. +% Es empfiehlt sich --~wie in vielen Fällen in \LaTeX~--, die Längen relativ zur Zeilenlänge zu wählen. +% (Die Standardeinstellung wird z.\,B. durch \verb+[0.4\linewidth,0.5\linewidth]+ realisiert.)\par +% Übersteigen die Längen in der Summe die Zeilenbreite, so erscheint eine Warnung.\macropar +% +% \macrodescription{vorwort}% +% Dieser Befehl setzt lediglich die Überschrift \enquote{Vorwort}. +% Die Sprache der Überschrift wird anhand der gewählten Klassenoption ausgewählt (siehe \cref{sec:optionen}). +% Die Überschrift kann verändert werden, indem der Befehl \fmacro{VorwortTitel} umdefiniert wird. +% Dies muss nach der Präambel gemacht werden.\macropar +% +% \subsection{Der Hauptteil} +% \label{sec:hauptteil} +% \noindent\macrodescription{kapitel}\oarg{Titel im Inhaltsverzeichnis}\marg{Titel}\marg{Autor(en)}\descriptionpar +% Dieser Befehl ist für die Verwendung in Mehrautorenbüchern (siehe Klassenoption \optref{format}). +% Er ist dort statt des Standard-\LaTeX-Befehls \fmacro{chapter} zu nutzen! +% Die ersten beiden Argumente funktionieren wie die von \fmacro{chapter}. +% Im dritten Argument wird der Autor bzw. die Autoren des Kapitels angegeben. +% Es erscheint unterhalb der Kapitelüberschrift.\macropar +% +% \section{Klassenoptionen} +% \label{sec:optionen} +% Die vorliegende \LaTeX-Klasse ist für deutsch- und englischsprachige Dokumente entwickelt worden. +% Damit die Klasse nutzbar ist, ist es empfohlen --~wenn auch nicht zwingend notwendig~--, eine der Sprachen als Option anzugeben.\par\bigskip +% +% \optdescription{deutsch} +% Diese Option nimmt alle Sprachvoreinstellungen für ein deutsches Dokument mit neuer Rechtschreibung vor. +% Mit Hilfe des \paket{babel}-Pakets wird \option{ngerman} als Sprache eingestellt \cite{babel}.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{deutsch-ar} +% Diese Option nimmt alle Sprachvoreinstellungen für ein deutsches Dokument mit alter Rechtschreibung vor. +% Mit Hilfe des \paket{babel}-Pakets wird \option{german} als Sprache eingestellt \cite{babel}.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{englisch} +% Diese Option nimmt alle Sprachvoreinstellungen für ein englisches Dokument vor. +% Mit Hilfe des \paket{babel}-Pakets wird \option{british} als Sprache eingestellt \cite{babel}.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription[format]{format=\farg{Buchart}} +% Mit der vorliegenden Klasse können sowohl Monografien in verschiedenen Formaten als auch Mehrautorenbücher gesetzt werden. +% Damit alle Formatierungen entsprechend angepasst werden, muss die Art des Buches mit Hilfe der \option{format}-Option angegeben werden.\par +% Folgende Angaben sind möglich: \option{a5-monografie}, \option{handbuch-monografie} und \option{a5-mehrautorenbuch} für Bücher bei \textbf{Springer Gabler Research}, \textbf{Springer Vieweg Research} und \textbf{Springer Spektrum Research} sowie \option{vs} für Bücher bei \textbf{Springer VS Research} und \textbf{Springer VS Forschung}.\par +% Für die Einstellung \option{a5-mehrautorenbuch} wird zusätzlich der Befehl \fmacro{kapitel} bereitgestellt (siehe \cref{sec:vorspann}).\par +% Wird kein Format angegeben, so wird automatisch \option{a5-monografie} eingestellt.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{no-shorthands} +% Wird die Klasse mit der Option \optref{englisch} geladen, so werden automatisch deutsche \enquote{shorthands} aktiviert. +% Dies sind z.\,B. die in \cref{sec:zeilenumbrueche} beschriebenen Kurzbefehle, die mit dem Zeichen \texttt{"} (ASCII-Strichelchen) beginnen. +% Für die händische Silbentrennung ist dies praktisch, wie in \cref{sec:zeilenumbrueche} beschrieben wird. +% Es kann allerdings in Einzelfällen zu Fehlern führen. +% Mit dieser Option lassen sich diese shorthands vollständig ausschalten.\par +% Möchte man die shorthands nur temporär ausschalten, so kann man den Befehl \fmacro{shorthandoff}\sarg{"} aus dem \paket{babel}-Paket nutzen \cite{babel}. +% Mit \fmacro{shorthandon}\sarg{"} werden sie wieder aktiviert.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{no-microtype} +% Die Klasse bindet automatisch das Paket \paket{microtype} ein, um die Mikrotypographie des Dokuments zu verbessern (siehe \cref{sec:umbrueche}) \cite{microtype}. +% Diese Option verhindert das Einbinden.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{non-ams} +% Die Klasse bindet automatisch das Paket \paket{onlyamsmath} ein, das einen Fehler ausgibt, sobald eine Matheumgebung genutzt wird, die nicht von \paket{amsmath} stammt \cite{onlyamsmath}. +% Warum das sinnvoll ist, wird in \cref{sec:mathesatz} erklärt. +% Sollten Sie dennoch solche Matheumgebungen nutzen wollen, so können Sie die Fehler mit dieser Option verhindern.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{test} +% Diese Option ist dazu da, den Satz eines Dokuments zu überprüfen. +% Sie schaltet einen Rahmen um den Satzspiegel ein, so dass Abweichungen davon leichter überprüft werden können. +% Zudem werden \emph{overfull boxes} (z.\,B. überlange Zeilen) \cite{texbook,latex-begleiter} durch schwarze Kästchen markiert.\descriptionpar +% +% \optdescription{schriftgroesse=\farg{Wert}} +% Mit dieser Option kann die (Standard-)Schriftgröße Ihres Dokuments eingestellt werden. +% Die Angabe \farg{Wert} gibt die Schriftgröße in pt an. +% Diese sollte nicht kleiner als 10\,pt sein, voreingestellt sind 11\,pt.\descriptionpar +% +% \section{Gestaltungshinweise} +% \label{sec:hinweise} +% In diesem Kapitel werden Hinweise zu einigen Themen gegeben, die zwar für die Gestaltung eines Buches bei Springer Research wichtig sind, jedoch nicht automatisiert in dieser Klasse implementiert werden konnten und einige Arbeit durch den Nutzer der Klasse erfordern. +% Dieses Kapitel soll Ihnen die Arbeit erleichtern. +% +% \subsection{Abbildungen und Tabellen} +% \label{sec:gleitobjekte} +% Abbildungen und Tabellen werden in \LaTeX\ meist als sogenannte \emph{Gleitobjekte} gesetzt. +% Das bedeutet, dass diese Objekte nicht an einer festen Stelle im Text gesetzt werden, sondern \emph{gleiten} können und dort gesetzt werden, wo es für den Satz am sinnvollsten ist.\par +% \subsubsection{Platzierung von Gleitobjekten} +% \label{sec:platzierung} +% Gleitobjekte für Abbildungen werden in der Regel durch die \env{figure}-Umgebung erzeugt, solche für Tabellen durch die \env{table}-Umgebung. +% Die Platzierung der Gleitobjekte lässt sich mit Hilfe des optionalen Arguments dieser Umgebungen beeinflussen. +% Dafür gibt es folgende Möglichkeiten: +% \begin{description} +% \item[\texttt{h}] +% \LaTeX\ soll versuchen, das Gleitobjekt \textbf{h}ier zu platzieren +% \item[\texttt{t}] +% \LaTeX\ soll versuchen, das Gleitobjekt oben auf einer Seite zu platzieren (\textbf{t}op) +% \item[\texttt{b}] +% \LaTeX\ soll versuchen, das Gleitobjekt unten auf einer Seite zu platzieren (\textbf{b}ottom) +% \item[\texttt{p}] +% \LaTeX\ soll das Gleitobjekt auf einer eigenen Seite (\textbf{p}age) --~die keinerlei Fließtext, sondern nur (eines oder mehrere) Gleitobjekte enthält~-- platzieren +% \end{description} +% Die Reihenfolge der angegebenen Parameter ist unerheblich, sie werden immer in der hier aufgeführten Reihenfolge abgearbeitet:\\ +% \fmacro{begin}\sarg{figure}\soarg{ht} ist das gleiche wie \fmacro{begin}\sarg{figure}\soarg{th}.\par +% Dabei beachtet \LaTeX\ einige voreingestellte Bedingungen (z.\,B. wie viel Prozent einer Seite mit Gleitobjekten gefüllt sein dürfen). +% Um diese Bedingungen temporär abzuschalten, kann zusätzlich zu den oben aufgeführten Parametern ein \enquote{\texttt{!}} genutzt werden (z.\,B. \mbox{\fmacro{begin}\sarg{figure}\soarg{ht!}})\cite{latex-begleiter,l2kurz,wikibooks-floats}.\par +% Da Gleitobjekte gleichen Typs nicht aneinander vorbei gleiten können (Gleitobjekte verschiedenen Typs aber sehr wohl!), d.\,h. die Reihenfolge der \env{table}-Umgebungen und die Reihenfolge der \env{figure}-Umgebungen bleiben erhalten, kann es manchmal sinnvoll sein, den Parameter \enquote{\texttt{p}} zu nutzen, da sonst ein großes Gleitobjekt die anderen aufhalten kann, so dass viele Gleitobjekte auf"|laufen, die dann alle erst am Ende des Kapitels gesetzt werden.\par +% Grundsätzlich sollten Abbildungen und Tabellen möglichst oben auf einer Seite erscheinen (Vorgabe von Springer Research).\par +% Manche Abbildungen oder Tabellen sollen auch nicht gleiten, sondern an einem festen Platz gesetzt werden. +% Dafür gibt es mehrere Möglichkeiten: Zum einen gibt es keinen Zwang, Abbildungen und Tabellen in Gleitumgebungen zu stecken --~was nicht gleiten soll, sollte nicht gleitbar gemacht werden! +% Zum anderen gibt es mit Hilfe des \paket{float}-Pakets die Möglichkeit, im optionalen Argument der Gleitumgebungen den Parameter \enquote{\texttt{H}} zu nutzen. +% Dieser sorgt dafür, dass das Gleitobjekt definitiv an der Stelle gesetzt wird, an der es im Text auftaucht \cite{float}. +% +% \subsubsection{Über- und Unterschriften} +% \label{sec:beschriftung} +% Abbildungen sind mit \textbf{Unter}schriften zu versehen, Tabellen mit \textbf{Über}schriften. +% Diese Klasse ist zwar so eingestellt, dass die vertikalen Abstände vor und nach den Beschriftungen passend sind, allerdings kann die Platzierung der Beschriftungen von \LaTeX\ nicht automatisch gesteuert werden! +% Nutzen Sie den Befehl \fmacro{caption} oder \fmacro{caption*} und setzen Sie diesen entsprechend \textbf{nach} einer Abbildung und \textbf{vor} einer Tabelle.\par +% Wenn Sie, wie in \cref{sec:platzierung} beschrieben, Tabellen oder Abbildungen außerhalb von Gleitumgebungen setzen, so verwenden Sie den Befehl \fmacro{captionof} bzw. \fmacro{captionof*} aus dem \paket{caption}-Paket, welches von der Klasse ohnehin geladen wird \cite{caption}.\par +% Wenn Sie den von \LaTeX\ bereitgestellten \fmacro{label}-\fmacro{ref}-Mechanismus (siehe auch \cref{sec:paketempfehlungen}) verwenden, um auf Abbildungen und Tabellen zu verweisen, was zu empfehlen ist, so müssen Sie das Label immer \textbf{nach} dem entsprechenden \fmacro{caption}- bzw. \fmacro{captionof}-Befehl setzen. +% +% \subsubsection{Abbildungen und Tabellen im Querformat} +% \label{sec:querformat} +% Für Abbildungen und Tabellen im Querformat gibt es mit \LaTeX\ verschiedene Lösungen. +% Der Autor dieser Klasse empfiehlt dafür, das Paket \paket{rotating} mit der Paketoption \option{figuresright} einzubinden und die von diesem Paket bereitgestellten Umgebungen \env{sidewaysfigure} und \env{sidewaystable} zu nutzen \cite{rotating}.\par +% Sollten Sie für Ihr Dokument statt \programm{pdflatex} den Workflow \programm{latex} \mbox{$\rightarrow$ \programm{dvips}} \mbox{$\rightarrow$ \programm{ps2pdf}} nutzen (wovon der Autor dieses Dokuments dringend abrät), so beachten Sie, dass Sie \programm{ps2pdf} mit der Option \texttt{-dAutoRotatePages=/None} aufrufen, damit die Querformat-Seiten im pdf-Dokument nicht automatisch rotiert angezeigt werden. +% +% \subsection{Seiten- und Zeilenumbrüche} +% \label{sec:umbrueche} +% \LaTeX\ (bzw. \TeX) verwendet einen sehr ausgefeilten Algorithmus, um den Zeilen- und Seitenumbruch zu optimieren \cite{texbook}. +% Allerdings muss auch beim besten Algorithmus manchmal an einigen Stellen von Hand nachgearbeitet werden. +% Um die Arbeit dabei zu erleichtern, kann die Option \optref{test} genutzt werden. +% Unabhängig davon, wie man die Umbrüche bearbeitet, sollte man dies als letzte Arbeit an einem Werk vornehmen, da sich durch andere Arbeiten, z.\,B. das Verschieben von Abbildungen, der Zeilen- und Seitenumbruch wieder verändern kann.\par +% Diese Klasse nutzt das Paket \paket{microtype}, das einen Randausgleich vornimmt, der dafür sorgt, dass der rechte Rand einer Seite (im Blocksatz) weniger \enquote{flatterig} aussieht \cite{microtype}. +% Dies geschieht, indem einige Zeichen (z.\,B. Bindestriche und Satzzeichen) minimal verschoben werden (was im Einzelfall kaum erkennbar ist, aber insgesamt einen beeindruckenden Effekt hat). +% Sollte Ihnen dies nicht gefallen, so nutzen Sie die Klassenoption \optref{no-microtype}. +% +% \subsubsection{Zeilenumbrüche und Silbentrennung} +% \label{sec:zeilenumbrueche} +% Die einfachste Möglichkeit, auf Zeilenumbrüche Einfluss zu nehmen, ist es, falsche Silbentrennung zu verbessern. +% Dafür gibt es in \LaTeX\ mehrere Möglichkeiten.\par +% Kommt ein Wort, das von \LaTeX\ falsch getrennt wird, sehr häufig im Text vor, so ist es sinnvoll, \LaTeX\ die korrekte Trennung beizubringen. +% Dies funktioniert mit dem Befehl \fmacro{hyphenation}. +% So könnte man \LaTeX\ die Trennung des Wortes \enquote{Femtosekundenlaser} folgendermaßen erklären: \fmacro{hyphenation}\sarg{Fem-to-se-kun-den-la-ser}. +% Dieses Wort wird dann nur dort getrennt, wo in dem Befehl ein Bindestrich steht. +% Dies gilt jedoch immer nur für exakt dieses Wort (nicht für abgeleitete Formen) und nur in der aktuell eingestellten Sprache \cite{babel,latex-begleiter}.\par +% Für die manuelle Trennung einzelner Wörter kann man \LaTeX\ im Einzelfall auch neue Trennregeln beibringen. +% Dies geschieht im Fließtext mit Hilfe so genannter \enquote{shorthands}:\shorthandoff{"} +% \begin{description} +% \item[\texttt{\textbackslash-}] +% Das Wort darf \textbf{nur} an dieser Stelle getrennt werden. +% \item[\texttt{"-}] +% Dies gibt eine \textbf{zusätzliche} Trennstelle an (zu denen, die \LaTeX\ für dieses Wort bereits kennt/gefunden hat). +% \item[\texttt{"=}] +% Es wird ein Bindestrich erzeugt. Die übrigen Trennstellen bleiben davon unbeeinflusst. +% \item[\texttt{""}] +% Dies gibt eine Stelle an, an der getrennt werden darf, ohne dass ein Bindestrich gesetzt wird. +% \item[\texttt{"\textasciitilde}] +% Dies erzeugt einen Bindestrich, an dem \textbf{nicht} getrennt werden darf. +% \end{description} +% Die aufgeführten shorthands werden einfach innerhalb eines Wortes verwendet, z.\,B.: \texttt{Femto"-sekunden"=Laser} \cite{babel,latex-begleiter,wikibooks-silbentrennung}.\par\shorthandon{"} +% Der Vollständigkeit halber sei noch der Standard-\TeX-Befehl \texttt{\textasciitilde}~(Tilde) erwähnt. +% Dieser erzeugt ein Leerzeichen, an dem nicht getrennt werden darf (geschütztes Leerzeichen), was zum Beispiel bei Konstrukten wie \enquote{Seite~5} sinnvoll sein kann.\par +% Manchmal kommt man mit der einfachen Verbesserung der Silbentrennung nicht weiter, sondern muss manuell Zeilenumbrüche einfügen. +% Dabei ist es sinnvoll, \LaTeX\ noch eine gewisse Entscheidungsfreiheit zu lassen. +% Der Befehl \fmacro{linebreak} ermöglicht genau dies. +% Er zeigt \LaTeX\ an, dass an dieser Stelle ein Zeilenumbruch sinnvoll wäre. +% Mit Hilfe eines optionalen Arguments kann angegeben werden, wie sinnvoll oder dringend der Zeilenumbruch an dieser Stelle ist. +% Dieses Argument kann eine Zahl zwischen null und vier sein, wobei eine höhere Zahl den Zeilenumbruch wahrscheinlicher (dringender) macht und \fmacro{linebreak} gleichbedeutend mit \fmacro{linebreak}\soarg{4} ist.\par +% Entgegengesetzt zu \fmacro{linebreak} gibt es den Befehl \fmacro{nolinebreak}. +% Sein optionales Argument funktioniert genau komplementär zu dem von \fmacro{linebreak} (\fmacro{nolinebreak}\soarg{4} verhindert den Zeilenumbruch am ehesten).\par +% Um die Trennung eines Wortes (oder einer Fließtextformel) zu verhindern, kann der Befehl \fmacro{mbox} verwendet werden. +% Dieser nimmt ein Argument auf, das dann nicht getrennt werden kann, z.\,B. \fmacro{mbox}\sarg{\textdollar 1+1=2\textdollar}. +% Dies kann jedoch dazu führen, dass der Text über den Zeilenrand hinaus geht, was weitere Umarbeitungen erfordert. +% +% +% \subsubsection{Seitenumbrüche} +% \label{sec:seitenumbrueche} +% An manchen Stellen werden Seitenumbrüche von Hand eingefügt, weil der jeweilige Autor (oder der Lektor) dies möchte. +% Diese Seitenumbrüche werden meist mit den Befehlen \fmacro{newpage} oder \fmacro{clearpage} erzeugt, wobei der Unterschied darin besteht, dass letzterer vor dem Seitenumbruch alle noch nicht positionierten Gleitobjekte (siehe \cref{sec:gleitobjekte}) setzt. +% Analog dazu gibt es den Befehl \fmacro{cleardoublepage}, der im Unterschied zu \fmacro{clearpage} dafür sorgt, dass die neue Seite eine ungerade (rechte) Seite ist, wozu manchmal eine Leerseite (Vakatseite) eingefügt werden muss.\par +% Soll jedoch nicht unbedingt eine neue Seite angefangen werden, sondern erscheint dies sinnvoll, um den Textsatz zu optimieren, so kann es praktisch sein, \LaTeX\ zwar Hinweise zu geben, wo eine Seite umgebrochen werden kann, die Entscheidung aber dem Programm zu überlassen. +% Für diese Fälle gibt es analog zu den Befehlen \fmacro{linebreak} und \fmacro{nolinebreak} (siehe \cref{sec:zeilenumbrueche}) die Befehle \fmacro{pagebreak} und \fmacro{nopagebreak}. +% Diese funktionieren vollständig analog zueinander (inklusive optionalem Argument).\par +% Ein Grund dafür, diese Befehle zu nutzen kann die Vermeidung von \emph{Schusterjungen} und \emph{Hurenkindern} sein. +% Das ist eine einzelne Zeile eines Absatzanfangs am Ende einer Seite bzw. eine einzelne Zeile eines Absatzendes am Anfang einer Seite. +% Sie sind unter allen Umständen (notfalls Umformulierung einzelner Sätze) zu vermeiden! +% Der Autor dieser \LaTeX-Klasse versucht, Sie dabei zu unterstützen, indem er die Werte \fmacro{clubpenalty}, \fmacro{widowpenalty} und \fmacro{displaywidowpenalty} (siehe \cite{texbook,latex-begleiter}) auf 9999 gesetzt hat. +% +% +% \subsection{Mathematiksatz} +% \label{sec:mathesatz} +% Die \LaTeX-Gemeinde ist sich heutzutage nahezu einig, dass für abgesetzte Formeln die Umgebungen verwendet werden sollten, die von der American Mathematical Society (AMS) im Paket \paket{amsmath} bereitgestellt werden, da bei diesen die Abstände am konsistentesten sind und Gleichungsnummern (im Gegensatz zu veralteten Umgebungen wie \env{eqnarray}) nicht überdruckt werden \cite{amsldoc,l2tabu}. +% Für einfache abgesetzte Formeln sind dies im Wesentlichen die \env{equation}-Umgebung (für einzelne Formeln) und die \env{align}-Umgebung (für mehrere Formeln) bzw. deren Sternversionen \env{equation*} und \env{align*} für nicht nummerierte Formeln.\par +% In dieser Klasse wird das Paket \paket{onlyamsmath} verwendet, das einen Fehler ausgibt, wenn Matheumgebungen genutzt werden, die nicht von der AMS stammen \cite{onlyamsmath}. +% Möchten Sie dieses Verhalten vermeiden, so nutzen Sie die Klassenoption \optref{non-ams}.\par +% Nützliche Hinweise zum Mathematiksatz in \LaTeX\ finden Sie in \cite{amsldoc,voss-mathe,voss-mathe-online,latex-begleiter,more-math}. +% +% +% \section{Weiterführendes} +% \label{sec:weiterfuehrendes} +% Hier finden Sie noch einige Tipps und Literaturempfehlungen sowie ein paar Hintergründe zu dieser Klasse. +% +% \subsection{Paketempfehlungen} +% \label{sec:paketempfehlungen} +% Hier werden nun einige Pakete aufgeführt, die der Autor dieser Klasse allgemein als nützlich ansieht. +% Sie werden nicht von der Klasse direkt geladen. +% Ob der Nutzer der Klasse sie verwendet, hängt also von ihm selbst ab. +% \begin{labeling}{\paket{booktabs}} +% \item[\paket{booktabs}] +% Verbesserte horizontale Linien für übersichtliche Tabellen \cite{booktabs}. +% \item[\paket{csquotes}] +% Einfache Schnittstelle für die Nutzung von Anführungszeichen \cite{csquotes}. +% \item[\paket{cleveref}] +% Komfortable Alternative zum \fmacro{ref}-Befehl (kompatibel mit \paket{varioref}) \cite{cleveref}. +% \item[\paket{varioref}] +% Praktische Ergänzung zum \fmacro{ref}-Befehl, gerade für gedruckte Werke bei Verweisen weit entfernt vom Label \cite{varioref}. +% \item[\paket{amsmath}] +% Sinnvolle Mathematik-Umgebungen und Weiteres (siehe auch \cref{sec:mathesatz}) \cite{amsldoc}. +% \item[\paket{siunitx}] +% Größen und Einheiten einfach und konsistent setzen \cite{siunitx}. +% \end{labeling} +% +% \subsection{Verwendete Pakete} +% \label{sec:verwendete-pakete} +% Hier werden kurz die von der Klasse geladenen Pakete (in der Reihenfolge, in der sie geladen werden) und ihre Funktionen aufgeführt. +% Das Wissen, welche Pakete geladen werden, kann wichtig sein, wenn der Nutzer der Klasse andere Pakete laden möchte, die mit den von der Klasse geladenen in Konflikt stehen könnten.\par +% Die Optionen, mit denen diese Pakete geladen werden, sind teilweise von den verwendeten Klassenoptionen abhängig (besonders von \optref{format}) und deshalb hier nicht aufgeführt. +% Sie sind bei Bedarf der Quelltextdatei \datei{sr-vorl.dtx} zu entnehmen. +% \begin{labeling}{\paket{onlyamsmath}\cite{onlyamsmath}} +% \item[\paket{scrbook} \cite{koma}] +% Dies ist die verwendete Dokumentenklasse aus dem \textsf{KOMA}-Script-Bündel. +% \item[\paket{xkeyval} \cite{xkeyval}] +% Notwendig zum Erstellen einiger Klassenoptionen. +% \item[\paket{etoolbox} \cite{etoolbox}] +% Stellt verschiedene if-Abfragen und Hooks zur Verfügung. +% \item[\paket{babel} \cite{babel}] +% Lädt die Sprachen. +% \item[\paket{geometry} \cite{geometry}] +% Wird zur Einstellung des Satzspiegels genutzt. +% \item[\paket{scrpage2} \cite{koma}] +% Für die Definition der Kopf- und Fußzeilen. +% Der definierte Standard-Seitenstil heißt \option{sr-standard}. +% \item[\paket{caption} \cite{caption}] +% Ermöglicht Einstellungen der Bild- und Tabellenbeschriftungen. +% \item[\paket{ragged2e} \cite{ragged2e}] +% Verbesserter Flattersatz. +% \item[\paket{enumitem} \cite{enumitem}] +% Einstellungen für Listen. +% \item[\paket{xstring} \cite{xstring}] +% Das Paket bietet viele Befehle zur String-Verarbeitung und "~auswertung. +% Es wird zur unter anderem Auswertung der Klassenoptionen verwendet. +% \item[\paket{chngcntr} \cite{chngcntr}] +% Das Paket dient der Modifikation von Zählern. +% Es wird zur Anpassung der Kapitel-, Abbildungs- und anderer Zähler bei Mehrautorenbüchern verwendet. +% \item[\paket{varwidth}] \cite{varwidth} +% Stellt die \env{varwidth}-Umgebung als Erweiterung der \env{minipage}-Umgebung bereit. +% \item[\paket{onlyamsmath} \cite{onlyamsmath}] +% Verhindert die Nutzung von Mathe-Umgebungen, die nicht von der AMS stammen (siehe auch die Option \optref{non-ams} in \cref{sec:optionen}). +% \item[\paket{microtype} \cite{microtype}] +% Verbesserte Mikrotypographie (siehe auch die Option \optref{no-microtype} in \cref{sec:optionen}). +% \end{labeling} +% +% \subsection{Literaturtipps} +% \label{sec:literaturtipps} +% Wie bereits eingangs erwähnt, ist dieses Dokument keine \LaTeX-Einführung. +% Man findet im Internet diverse Einführungen von verschiedener Länge und Qualität. +% Beispiele für Einführungen --~für deren Qualität der Autor dieses Dokuments keinerlei Garantie übernimmt~-- sind: \cite{l2kurz,beginners-introduction,buxbaum-presentation,simplified-introduction,juergens1,juergens2}. +% Gerade bei Werken älteren Datums muss man vor veralteten Befehlen auf der Hut sein. +% Eine Hilfe hierzu bietet \cite{l2tabu}. +% Dort sind einige veraltete Befehle und Pakete sowie sonstige Fehlerquellen benannt.\par +% Für den Mathematiksatz sei auf die bereits in \cref{sec:mathesatz} erwähnten Werke \cite{amsldoc,voss-mathe,voss-mathe-online,latex-begleiter,more-math} verwiesen.\par +% Weitere Orientierung bieten \cite{latex-begleiter,texbook,wikibooks-latex}. +% Nahezu alle Pakete inklusive ihrer Beschreibungen sowie weitere nützliche Dokumente finden Sie im \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} \cite{ctan}. +% Viele dieser Dokumente und Beschreibungen finden Sie auch in Ihrem \LaTeX-System auf Ihrem Rechner, indem Sie in der Konsole (Terminal, Bash, Eingabeaufforderung) folgendes eingeben: \texttt{texdoc \meta{Paketname}}\par +% Hilft das alles nicht weiter, so tut es manchmal auch eine Internetsuche. +% Neben einschlägig bekannten Suchmaschinen sind hier spezielle Foren nützlich, in denen sich hilfsbereite \LaTeX-Spezialisten tummeln, z.\,B. \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/} (englischsprachig, sehr viele aktive Nutzer) und \url{www.golatex.de} (deutschsprachig, weniger aktive Nutzer). +% +%\section{Lizenz} +% \label{sec:lizenz} +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public License, entweder Version 1.3c oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) jeder späteren Version, verteilt und/oder verändert werden. +% Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz ist:\\ +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}\\ +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status \enquote{author-maintained} (vom Autor betreut). +% +% +% \begin{otherlanguage}{british} +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in:\\ +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}\\ +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status \foreignquote{english}{author-maintained}. +% \end{otherlanguage} +% +% \nocite{*} +% \iftoggle{auxdatei} +% {\printbibliography[prenote=literatur]} +% {} +% +% \section*{Liste der Änderungen} +% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Liste der Änderungen} +% Hier finden Sie eine Übersicht über die Änderungen, die an dieser Klasse im Verlauf ihrer Versionen vorgenommen wurden. +% +% \begin{description} +% \aenderung{1.1}{Option \optref{format}}{Neue Einstellungsmöglichkeit \option{vs} für Bücher bei Springer VS.} +% \aenderung{1.1}{Befehl \macroref{verfasser}}{Neuer Befehl zum Satz von Autor und Ort des Geleitwortes.} +% \aenderung{1.1}{Umstellung auf \programm{biber}}{Die Bibliografie dieser Dokumentation wird nun mit \programm{biber} erzeugt.} +% \end{description} +% +%\StopEventually{} +% +%<*class> +\LoadClassWithOptions{scrbook} + + +\RequirePackage{xkeyval} +\RequirePackage{etoolbox} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{no-shorthands}{% + \global\Germanshorthandsfalse% +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{test}{% + \PassOptionsToClass{draft}{scrbook} + \PassOptionsToPackage{showframe}{geometry} +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{deutsch}{% + \PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel}% + \ifGermanshorthands% + \else% + \AfterEndPreamble{\shorthandoff{"}} + \fi% + \gdef\GeleitwortTitel{Geleitwort}% + \gdef\VorwortTitel{Vorwort}% +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{deutsch-ar}{% + \PassOptionsToPackage{german}{babel}% + \ifGermanshorthands% + \else% + \AfterEndPreamble{\shorthandoff{"}} + \fi% + \gdef\GeleitwortTitel{Geleitwort}% + \gdef\VorwortTitel{Vorwort}% +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{englisch}{% + \PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman,british}{babel}% + \ifGermanshorthands% + \AfterPackage+{babel}{% + \useshorthands{"}% + \addto\extrasbritish{\languageshorthands{ngerman}}% + }% + \fi% + \gdef\GeleitwortTitel{Foreword}% + \gdef\VorwortTitel{Preface}% +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{no-microtype}{% + \global\Microtypefalse% +} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{non-ams}{% + \global\AMSfalse% +} + + +\gdef\sr@schriftgroesse{11}% Standard-Schriftgroesse +\gdef\sr@format{a5-monografie}% Standard-Format + +\newif\ifMicrotype% soll microtype eingebunden werden +\Microtypetrue + +\newif\ifAMS% soll onlyamsmath eingebunden werden +\AMStrue + +\newif\ifGermanshorthands% sollen die deutschen shorthands auch im Englischen nutzbar sein +\Germanshorthandstrue + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{schriftgroesse}[11]{\gdef\sr@schriftgroesse{#1}} + +\DeclareOptionX[sr]{format}[a5-monografie]{\gdef\sr@format{#1}} + +\ProcessOptions\relax +\ProcessOptionsX[sr]\relax + + + + +\RequirePackage{babel} +\RequirePackage{geometry} +\RequirePackage{scrpage2} +\RequirePackage{caption} +\RequirePackage{ragged2e} +\RequirePackage{enumitem} +\RequirePackage{xstring} +\RequirePackage{chngcntr} +\RequirePackage{varwidth} +\ifAMS + \RequirePackage[all,error]{onlyamsmath} + \AtEndPreamble{% + \@ifpackageloaded{tikz}% Test, ob TikZ geladen wurde + {% Catcode für $ in tikz-Befehlen anpassen, um Konflikt zwischen onlyamsmath und TikZ zu vermeiden + \preto\tikzpicture{\catcode`$=3 } + \preto\tikz{\catcode`$=3 } + } + {} + } +\fi +\ifMicrotype + \RequirePackage{microtype} +\fi + + + +\ifundef{\GeleitwortTitel}% falls keine Sprachoption gesetzt wurde, wird der Befehl \GeleitwortTitel definiert + {\gdef\GeleitwortTitel{}} + {} +\ifundef{\VorwortTitel}% falls keine Sprachoption gesetzt wurde, wird der Befehl \VorwortTitel definiert + {\gdef\VorwortTitel{}} + {} + + + +\defpagestyle{plain} + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + + +\KOMAoptions{% Einstellungen der KOMA-Klasse + fontsize=\sr@schriftgroesse pt,% + open=right,% + captions=signature,% + captions=abovetable,% + appendixprefix=false,% +}% + +\gdef\frontmatter{% + \pagenumbering{Roman}% + \setcounter{page}{5}% +} + + +\captionsetup{% Einstellungen fuer Bild- und Tabellenbeschriftungen (mittels caption-Paket) + format=hang,% + font=small,% + labelfont=bf,% + justification=RaggedRight ,% + singlelinecheck=false,% +}% + +\setlist{labelindent=0em,leftmargin=*} + +\AfterEndPreamble{% + \pagestyle{sr-standard}% Standard-pagestyle einschalten + \raggedbottom% vertikalen Seitenausgleich abschalten +} + + +% Einstellungen fuer die verschiedenen Formate +\IfStrEqCase{\sr@format}{% + {a5-monografie}% + {% + \KOMAoptions{% + paper=a4,% + twoside,% + pagesize=auto,% + }% + \recalctypearea + \geometry{% Einstellungen fuer Satzspiegel (mittels geometry-Paket) + includehead,% + textwidth=11.5cm,% + height=18cm,% + }% + \automark[section]{chapter} + \defpagestyle{sr-standard}% Standard pagestyle + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {\pagemark\hfill\headmark}% + {\headmark\hfill\pagemark}% + {}% + (\textwidth,0.5pt)% + }% + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + }% + {handbuch-monografie}% + {% + \KOMAoptions{% + paper=16.8cm:24cm,% + twoside,% + pagesize=auto,% + }% + \recalctypearea + \geometry{% Einstellungen fuer Satzspiegel (mittels geometry-Paket) + includehead,% + textwidth=12.5cm,% + height=20cm,% + }% + \automark[section]{chapter} + \defpagestyle{sr-standard}% Standard pagestyle + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {\pagemark\hfill\headmark}% + {\headmark\hfill\pagemark}% + {}% + (\textwidth,0.5pt)% + }% + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + }% + {a5-mehrautorenbuch}% Einstellungen fuer Mehrautorenbuecher + {% + \KOMAoptions{% + paper=a4,% + twoside,% + pagesize=auto,% + }% + \recalctypearea + \geometry{% Einstellungen fuer Satzspiegel (mittels geometry-Paket) + includehead,% + textwidth=11.5cm,% + height=18cm,% + }% + \automark{chapter} + \defpagestyle{sr-standard}% Standard pagestyle + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {\pagemark\hfill\headmark}% + {\KapitelAutor\hfill\pagemark}% + {}% + (\textwidth,0.5pt)% + }% + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + \gdef\KapitelAutor{}% + \newcommand{\sr@chapterheadstartvskip}{% Definition eines neuen Abstands vor Kapitelanfaengen + \vspace*{1.8\baselineskip}% + }% + \newcommand{\sr@chapterheadendvskip}{% Definition eines neuen Abstands nach Kapitelanfaengen + \vspace{.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus .05\baselineskip}% + }% + \let\old@chapterheadstartvskip\chapterheadstartvskip% Sicherung des alten Abstandes vor Kapitelanfaengen + \let\old@chapterheadendvskip\chapterheadendvskip% Sicherung des alten Abstandes nach Kapitelanfaengen + \counterwithout{section}{chapter}% + \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}% + \counterwithout{table}{chapter}% + \counterwithout{equation}{chapter}% + \counterwithin*{section}{chapter}% + \counterwithin*{figure}{chapter}% + \counterwithin*{table}{chapter}% + \counterwithin*{equation}{chapter}% + \counterwithin*{footnote}{chapter}% + }% + {vs}% Einstellungen fuer Buch bei Springer VS + {% + \KOMAoptions{% + paper=a4,% + twoside,% + pagesize=auto,% + }% + \recalctypearea + \geometry{% Einstellungen fuer Satzspiegel (mittels geometry-Paket) + includehead,% + textwidth=11.5cm,% + height=18cm,% + }% + \automark[section]{chapter} + \defpagestyle{sr-standard}% Standard pagestyle + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {\pagemark\hfill\headmark}% + {\headmark\hfill\pagemark}% + {}% + (\textwidth,0.5pt)% + }% + {% + (0pt,0pt)% + {}% + {}% + {}% + (0pt,0pt)% + }% + \gdef\frontmatter{% + \pagenumbering{arabic}% + \setcounter{page}{5}% + }% + \let\old@chapterheadstartvskip\chapterheadstartvskip% + \let\old@chapterheadendvskip\chapterheadendvskip% + \renewcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace*{-\topskip}}% + \renewcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vspace{72pt}}% + \deffootnote% + {1em}% + {1em}% + {\thefootnotemark\ }% + }% +} + + +\newlength{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}% vertikaler Abstand vor der Widmung + +\newlength{\sr@verfasserbreite@ort}% Breite des Ortes im Befehl \verfasser +\newlength{\sr@verfasserbreite@name}% Breite des Namens im Befehl \verfasser + + +% \begin{environment}{widmung} +% Widmung +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{widmung}[1][] + {% + \ifblank{#1}% + {% + \cleardoublepage% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \setlength{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}{-2\baselineskip}% + \addtolength{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}{\stretch{1}}% + \vspace*{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}% + \begin{flushright}% + }% + {% + \let\raggedsection\raggedleft% + \setlength{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}{-\baselineskip}% + \addtolength{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}{\stretch{1}}% + \def\chapterheadstartvskip{\vspace*{\sr@widmungstretch@oben}}% + \chapter*{\raggedleft #1}% + \begin{flushright}% + }% + \itshape% + }% + {% + \end{flushright}% + \vspace*{\stretch{1.618}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} + + +% \begin{macro}{\vorwort} +% Vorwort-Kapitel +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\vorwort}{% + \addchap*{\VorwortTitel}% + \markboth{\VorwortTitel}{\VorwortTitel} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + + +% \begin{macro}{\geleitwort} +% Geleitwort-Kapitel +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\geleitwort}{% + \addchap*{\GeleitwortTitel}% + \markboth{\GeleitwortTitel}{\GeleitwortTitel} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% \begin{macro}{\verfasser} +% Geleitwort-Kapitel +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\verfasser}[3][0.4\linewidth,0.5\linewidth]{% + \StrBefore{#1}{,}[\sr@verfasserbefehl@ort]% + \StrBehind{#1}{,}[\sr@verfasserbefehl@name]% + \setlength{\sr@verfasserbreite@ort}{\sr@verfasserbefehl@ort}% + \setlength{\sr@verfasserbreite@name}{\sr@verfasserbefehl@name}% + \ifdimcomp{\sr@verfasserbreite@name + \sr@verfasserbreite@ort}{>}{\linewidth}% gucken, ob alles in eine Zeile passt + {% es passt nicht in eine Zeile + \ClassWarning{sr-vorl}{Die Summe der im Befehl '\verfasser' genutzten Laengen ist groesser als die Zeilenbreite!}% Warnung, wenn die Laengen zu gross sind + }% + {}% es passt in eine Zeile + % + \nopagebreak% + + \nopagebreak% + \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.75\baselineskip}% + \nopagebreak% + \noindent + \begin{varwidth}[t]{\sr@verfasserbreite@ort}% + \raggedright% + #2% + \end{varwidth}% + \hfill% + \begin{varwidth}[t]{\sr@verfasserbreite@name}% + \raggedleft% + #3% + \end{varwidth}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + + +% \begin{macro}{\kapitel} +% Kapitel-Befehl fuer Mehrautorenbuecher +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\kapitel}[3][]{% + \gdef\KapitelAutor{#3}% + \stepcounter{chapter} + \let\chapterheadstartvskip\sr@chapterheadstartvskip% + \let\chapterheadendvskip\sr@chapterheadendvskip% + \ifblank{#1}% + {\addchap{#2}}% + {\addchap[#1]{#2}}% + \let\chapterheadstartvskip\old@chapterheadstartvskip% + \let\chapterheadendvskip\old@chapterheadendvskip% + {\usekomafont{section}\itshape#3}\par% + \vspace*{1.35\baselineskip plus 0.09\baselineskip minus .15\baselineskip}% + \noindent% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + + +% Einstellungen fuer Gleitobjekte +\setcounter{topnumber}{3} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{5} + +\renewcommand{\topfraction}{1} +\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{0.4} +\renewcommand{\textfraction}{0.05} +\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{0.7} + +\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt} +\setlength{\@fpsep}{8pt} +\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fil} + +\clubpenalty=9999 +\widowpenalty=9999 +\displaywidowpenalty=9999 + +% +% +% +%<*frontmatter> +%% Diese Datei sollte den Vorspann Ihrer Arbeit enthalten, wie z. B. Titelei, Vorwort, Geleitwort, Danksagung, Inhaltsverzeichnis, Abbildungsverzeichnis. +\frontmatter +\begin{widmung}% Innerhalb dieser Umgebung koennen Sie Ihre Widmung schreiben. + +\end{widmung} + +\geleitwort% Hier koennen Sie Ihr Geleitwort schreiben. + + +\vorwort% Hier koennen Sie Ihr Vorwort schreiben. + + +%% Hier koennen Inhaltsverzeichnis, Abbildungsverzeichnis und Aehnliches folgen. + +% +% +% +%<*mainmatter> +%% Diese Datei sollte den Hauptteil Ihrer Arbeit enthalten. +\mainmatter + +% +% +% +%<*backmatter> +%% Diese Datei sollte den Nachspann (Anhang, Literaturverzeichnis etc.) Ihrer Arbeit enthalten. +\backmatter +%% + +% +% +% +%<*hauptdatei> +%% Dies ist die Hauptdatei Ihrer Arbeit. Hier koennen Sie Pakete einbinden, Definitionen vornehmen und Aehnliches. +\documentclass{sr-vorl} + +\begin{document} +\input{frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex}%% Die Datei, die den Vorspann Ihrer Arbeit enthalten sollte, wird eingebunden. + +\input{mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex}%% Die Datei, die den Hauptteil Ihrer Arbeit enthalten sollte, wird eingebunden. + +\input{backmatter_sr-vorl.tex}%% Die Datei, die den Nachspann Ihrer Arbeit enthalten sollte, wird eingebunden. + +\end{document} + +% +% +%\Finale diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.ins b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.ins new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5f18452147 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.ins @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +%% Copyright 2013-2016 by Jonas L. Dabelow +%% +%% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public License, +%% entweder Version 1.3c oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) jeder spaeteren Version, +%% verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +%% Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz ist: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status "author-maintained" (vom Autor betreut). +%% +%% Dieses Werk besteht aus den Dateien sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +%% and the derived files sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +%% mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex und hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. +%% +%% +%% +%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% +%% This work consists of the files sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +%% and the derived files sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +%% mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex and hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. +%% +%% +%% +%% Die vorliegende Datei ist Teil einer LaTeX-Klasse zur Erstellung einer Veroeffentlichung nach +%% den Massgaben von Springer Research. + + +\input docstrip +\askforoverwritefalse +\preamble + + + +Copyright 2013-2016 by Jonas L. Dabelow + +Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public License, +entweder Version 1.3c oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) jeder spaeteren Version, +verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz ist: + +http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status "author-maintained" (vom Autor betreut). + +Dieses Werk besteht aus den Dateien sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +und den daraus erzeugten Dateien sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex und hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. + + + +This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +of this license or (at your option) any later version. +The latest version of this license is in: + +http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". + +This work consists of the files sr-vorl.dtx and sr-vorl.ins +and the derived files sr-vorl.cls, frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, +mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex, backmatter_sr-vorl.tex and hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex. + + + +Die vorliegende Datei ist Teil einer LaTeX-Klasse zur Erstellung einer Veroeffentlichung nach +den Massgaben von Springer Research und Springer VS. + +\endpreamble +\generate{% + \file{sr-vorl.cls}{\from{sr-vorl.dtx}{class}}% + \file{frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex}{\from{sr-vorl.dtx}{frontmatter}} + \file{mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex}{\from{sr-vorl.dtx}{mainmatter}} + \file{backmatter_sr-vorl.tex}{\from{sr-vorl.dtx}{backmatter}} + \file{hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex}{\from{sr-vorl.dtx}{hauptdatei}} +} + +\obeyspaces +\Msg{***********************************************************} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Sie haben die Klassendatei *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* sr-vorl.cls *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* erzeugt. Verschieben Sie diese in einen Ordner, der *} +\Msg{* von TeX durchsucht wird. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Um die erzeugte Klasse zu nutzen, koennen Sie die *} +\Msg{* automatisch erzeugten Dateien hauptdatei_sr-vorl.tex, *} +\Msg{* frontmatter_sr-vorl.tex, mainmatter_sr-vorl.tex und *} +\Msg{* backmatter_sr-vorl.tex nutzen. Fuer Details schauen Sie *} +\Msg{* bitte in die Dokumentation. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Um die Dokumentation zu erzeugen, muessen Sie die Datei *} +\Msg{* sr-vorl.dtx mit latex oder pdflatex aufrufen. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Froehliches TeXen! *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{***********************************************************} + +\endbatchfile diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..73da9de1ed Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.dvi b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.dvi new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..097552a09b Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.dvi differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a40bbf9827 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bbb79e69f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/actinf.tex @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass[draft]{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] +%\usepackage{draftcopy} +\newcommand{\SJour}{\textsc{SVJour}} + +\title{The \SJour\ document class users guide\\supplement +for\\\textit{Acta Informatica}} + +\author{\copyright~1998, Springer Verlag Heidelberg\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{11 June 1998} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} +This document describes the \textit{actinf} option for the +\SJour\ \LaTeXe\ document class. For details on +manuscript handling and the review process we refer to the +\emph{Instructions for authors} in the printed journal. For style +matters please consult previous issues of the journal. + +\section{Initializing the class} +\label{sec:opt} + +As explained in the main \emph{Users guide} you can +begin a document for \emph{Acta Informatica} by including +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[actinf]{svjour} +\end{verbatim} +as the first line in your text. All other options are also described +in the main \emph{Users guide}. +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/read.me b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/read.me new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6fe417340 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/read.me @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +% read.me +% LaTeX class for Acta Informatica +% read-me file +% (c) Springer-Verlag HD +%----------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +This directory contains the LaTeX2e support for the +journal "Acta Informatica" + + +CONTENTS + + read.me This file + SVJour.cls Core document class file for Springer journals + usrguide.* Main User's Guide (PDF and DVI) + svactinf.clo Class option file for Acta Informatica + actinf.* User's Guide for Acta Informatica (PDF and DVI) + template.tex A fill-in-form for a standard article with usage comments + + +INSTALLATION + +Copy SVJour.cls and svactinf.clo to a place where LaTeX can find them. + + +GETTING STARTED + +You should first read the "Main User's Guide" to get an overview +and then the "User's Guide for Acta Informatica" for special +instructions concerning this journal. Alternatively to reading the +entire documentation, it is also possible to proceed by merely filling +out the template and then looking up additional commands as needed. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svactinf.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svactinf.clo new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5e37bea44 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svactinf.clo @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +% SVJour DOCUMENT CLASS OPTION Actinf version 1.1 -- Acta Informatica +% by K. Steingraeber +% +% This is an enhancement for the +% LaTeX document class for Springer journals (one column version) +% +%% +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\ProvidesFile{svactinf.clo} + [1998/09/02 by K. Steingraeber + style option v1.1 for Acta Informatica] +\typeout{SVJour Class option: svactinf.clo for Acta Informatica} +\ExecuteOptions{final,10pt,runningheads} +% No size changing allowed, hence a copy of size10.clo is included +\renewcommand\normalsize{% + \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13pt}% + \abovedisplayskip=3 mm plus6pt minus 4pt + \belowdisplayskip=3 mm plus6pt minus 4pt + \abovedisplayshortskip=0.0 mm plus6pt + \belowdisplayshortskip=2 mm plus4pt minus 4pt + \let\@listi\@listI} +\normalsize +\newcommand\small{% + \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11pt}% + \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@ + \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@ + \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ + \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \parsep 0\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus\p@ + \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ + \itemsep0\p@}% + \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +} +\let\footnotesize\small +\newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt} +\newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt} +\newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}} +\newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{16dd}} +\newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{17dd}} +\newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}} +\newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}} +% +\setlength{\textwidth}{25.5cc} +\setlength{\textheight}{517.5dd} +% +% +\AtEndOfClass{% +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}% + {-13dd plus-4pt minus-4pt}{-.01pt}{\normalsize\itshape}} +\aftertext=3pt +\let\if@smartand\iffalse +\def\@thmcounterend{.}% +\def\runinend{.}% +\journalname{Acta Informatica}} +% +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `svactinf.clo'. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svjour.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svjour.cls new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..79d1402952 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/svjour.cls @@ -0,0 +1,1236 @@ +% SVJour DOCUMENT CLASS -- version 1.8 for LaTeX2e +% +% LaTeX document class for Springer journals +% +%% +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] +\ProvidesClass{svjour}[1999/09/14 +^^JLaTeX document class for Springer journals - version 1.8] +\newcommand\@ptsize{} +\newif\if@restonecol +\newif\if@titlepage +\@titlepagefalse +\DeclareOption{a4paper} + {\setlength\paperheight {297mm}% + \setlength\paperwidth {210mm}} +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue} +\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}} +\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength\overfullrule{0pt}} +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue} +\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}\AtEndOfClass{\mathindent\z@}} +\let\if@mathematic\iftrue +\let\if@numbook\iffalse +\DeclareOption{numbook}{\let\if@envcntsect\iftrue + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \renewcommand\thefigure{\thesection.\@arabic\c@figure}% + \renewcommand\thetable{\thesection.\@arabic\c@table}% + \renewcommand\theequation{\thesection.\@arabic\c@equation}% + \@addtoreset{figure}{section}% + \@addtoreset{table}{section}% + \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% + }% +} +\DeclareOption{openbib}{% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \renewcommand\@openbib@code{% + \advance\leftmargin\bibindent + \itemindent -\bibindent + \listparindent \itemindent + \parsep \z@ + }% + \renewcommand\newblock{\par}}% +} +% +\let\if@runhead\iffalse +\DeclareOption{runningheads}{\let\if@runhead\iftrue} +\let\if@smartrunh\iffalse +\DeclareOption{smartrunhead}{\let\if@smartrunh\iftrue} +\DeclareOption{nosmartrunhead}{\let\if@smartrunh\iffalse} +\let\if@envcntreset\iffalse +\DeclareOption{envcountreset}{\let\if@envcntreset\iftrue} +\let\if@envcntsame\iffalse +\DeclareOption{envcountsame}{\let\if@envcntsame\iftrue} +\let\if@envcntsect\iffalse +\DeclareOption{envcountsect}{\let\if@envcntsect\iftrue} +\let\if@referee\iffalse +\DeclareOption{referee}{\let\if@referee\iftrue} +\def\makereferee{\def\baselinestretch{2}} +\let\if@instindent\iffalse +\DeclareOption{instindent}{\let\if@instindent\iftrue} +\let\if@smartand\iffalse +\DeclareOption{smartand}{\let\if@smartand\iftrue} +\let\if@spthms\iftrue +\DeclareOption{nospthms}{\let\if@spthms\iffalse} +\let\switch@texts\relax +\DeclareOption{deutsch}{\def\switch@texts{\ds@deutsch}} +\DeclareOption{francais}{\def\switch@texts{\ds@francais}} +% +\let\journalopt\@empty +\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{sv\CurrentOption.clo}{% +\let\journalopt\CurrentOption}{% +\ClassWarning{Springer-SVJour}{Specified option or subpackage +"\CurrentOption" not found -}\OptionNotUsed}} +\ExecuteOptions{a4paper,twoside,10pt,instindent} +\ProcessOptions +\ifx\journalopt\@empty +\ClassError{Springer-SVJour}{No valid journal specified in option list}{} +\expandafter\stop +\fi +% +\if@smartrunh\AtEndDocument{\islastpageeven\getlastpagenumber}\fi +% +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Gamma}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"00} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Delta}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"01} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Theta}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"02} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Lambda}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"03} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Xi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"04} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Pi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"05} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Sigma}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"06} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Upsilon}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"07} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Phi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"08} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Psi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"09} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\Omega}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"0A} +% +\setlength\parindent{15\p@} +\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@} +\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@} +\setlength\headheight{12\p@} +\setlength\headsep {16.74dd} +\setlength\topskip {10\p@} +\setlength\footskip{30\p@} +\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip} +% +\@settopoint\textwidth +\setlength\marginparsep {10\p@} +\setlength\marginparpush{5\p@} +\setlength\topmargin{-10pt} +\if@twocolumn + \setlength\oddsidemargin {-30\p@} + \setlength\evensidemargin{-30\p@} +\else + \setlength\oddsidemargin {\z@} + \setlength\evensidemargin{\z@} +\fi +\setlength\marginparwidth {48\p@} +\setlength\footnotesep{8\p@} +\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@} +\setlength\intextsep {20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@} +\setlength\@fptop{0\p@} +\setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil} +\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@} +\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@} +\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil} +\setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@} +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \parsep \z@ + \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ + \itemsep\parsep} +\let\@listI\@listi +\@listi +\def\@listii {\leftmargin\leftmarginii + \labelwidth\leftmarginii + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \topsep \z@ + \parsep \topsep + \itemsep \parsep} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii + \labelwidth\leftmarginiii + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \topsep \z@ + \parsep \topsep + \itemsep \parsep} +\def\@listiv {\leftmargin\leftmarginiv + \labelwidth\leftmarginiv + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +\def\@listv {\leftmargin\leftmarginv + \labelwidth\leftmarginv + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +\def\@listvi {\leftmargin\leftmarginvi + \labelwidth\leftmarginvi + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +% +\setlength\lineskip{1\p@} +\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@} +\renewcommand\baselinestretch{} +\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@} +\@lowpenalty 51 +\@medpenalty 151 +\@highpenalty 301 +\setcounter{topnumber}{4} +\renewcommand\topfraction{.9} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} +\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.7} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{6} +\renewcommand\textfraction{.1} +\renewcommand\floatpagefraction{.85} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3} +\renewcommand\dbltopfraction{.85} +\renewcommand\dblfloatpagefraction{.85} +\def\ps@headings{% + \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty + \def\@evenhead{\small\rlap{\thepage}\hfil\leftmark\unskip}% + \def\@oddhead{\small\rightmark\hfil\llap{\thepage}}% + \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo + \let\sectionmark\@gobble + \let\subsectionmark\@gobble + } +% make indentations changeable +\def\setitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}% + \leftmargini\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargini\labelsep + \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep + \parsep=\parskip + \topsep=\medskipamount + \itemsep=\parskip \advance\itemsep by -\parsep}} +\def\setitemitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}% + \leftmarginii\labelwidth + \advance\leftmarginii\labelsep +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii + \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep + \parsep=\parskip + \topsep=\z@ + \itemsep=\parskip \advance\itemsep by -\parsep}} +% labels of description +\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep #1\hfil} +% adjusted environment "description" +% if an optional parameter (at the first two levels of lists) +% is present, its width is considered to be the widest mark +% throughout the current list. +\def\description{\@ifnextchar[{\@describe}{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ + \itemindent-\leftmargin \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}} +\let\enddescription\endlist +% +\def\describelabel#1{#1\hfil} +\def\@describe[#1]{\relax\ifnum\@listdepth=0 +\setitemindent{#1}\else\ifnum\@listdepth=1 +\setitemitemindent{#1}\fi\fi +\list{--}{\let\makelabel\describelabel}} +% +\newdimen\logodepth +\logodepth=2.2cm +\newdimen\headerboxheight +\headerboxheight=180pt % 18 10.5dd-lines - 2\baselineskip +\newdimen\betweenumberspace % dimension for space between +\betweenumberspace=3.33pt % number and text of titles. +\newdimen\aftertext % dimension for space after +\aftertext=5pt % text of title. +\newdimen\headlineindent % dimension for space between +\headlineindent=1.166cm % number and text of headings. +\def\andname{and} +\if@mathematic + \def\runinend{\enspace} + \def\floatcounterend{\enspace} + \def\sectcounterend{} +\else + \def\runinend{.} + \def\floatcounterend{.\ } + \def\sectcounterend{.} +\fi +\def\keywordname{{\bfseries Key words\runinend}} +\def\lastandname{, and} +\def\mailname{{\itshape Correspondence to\/}:} +\def\email#1{{e-mail: \tt#1}} +\def\keywords#1{\par\addvspace\baselineskip\noindent\keywordname\enspace +\ignorespaces#1} +% +\newcounter{inst} +\newcounter{auth} +\def\authdepth{2} +\newdimen\instindent +\newbox\authrun +\newtoks\authorrunning +\newbox\titrun +\newtoks\titlerunning +\def\authorfont{\bfseries} + +\def\combirunning#1{\gdef\@combi{#1}} +\def\@combi{} +\newbox\combirun +% +\def\ps@last{\def\@evenhead{\small\rlap{\thepage}\hfil +\lastevenhead}} +\newcounter{lastpage} +\def\islastpageeven{\@ifundefined{lastpagenumber} +{\setcounter{lastpage}{0}}{\setcounter{lastpage}{\lastpagenumber}} +\ifnum\value{lastpage}>0 + \ifodd\value{lastpage}% + \else + \if@smartrunh + \thispagestyle{last}% + \fi + \fi +\fi} +\def\getlastpagenumber{\clearpage +\addtocounter{page}{-1}% + \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\gdef\string\lastpagenumber{\thepage}}% + \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}}}% + \addtocounter{page}{1}} + +\def\journalname#1{\gdef\@journalname{#1}} + +\def\dedication#1{\gdef\@dedic{#1}} +\def\@dedic{} + +\let\@date\undefined + +\def\institute#1{\gdef\@institute{#1}} + +\def\institutename{\par + \begingroup + \parindent=0pt + \parskip=0pt + \setcounter{inst}{1}% + \def\and{\par\stepcounter{inst}% + \if@instindent\hangindent\instindent\fi + \noindent + \hbox to\instindent{\hss\smash{$^{\theinst}$}\enspace}\ignorespaces}% + \setbox0=\vbox{\def\thanks##1{}\@institute} + \ifnum\value{inst}>9\relax\setbox0=\hbox{$^{88}$\enspace}% + \else\setbox0=\hbox{$^{8}$\enspace}\fi + \instindent=\wd0\relax + \ifnum\value{inst}=1\relax + \else + \setcounter{inst}{1}% + \if@instindent\hangindent\instindent\fi + \noindent + \hbox to\instindent{\hss\smash{$^{\theinst}$}\enspace}\ignorespaces + \fi + \small + \ignorespaces + \@institute\par + \endgroup} + +\def\offprints#1{\begingroup +\def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}\xdef\@thanks{\@thanks +\protect\footnotetext[0]{\unskip\hskip-15pt{\itshape Send offprint requests +to\/}: \ignorespaces#1}}\endgroup\ignorespaces} + +\def\mail#1{\gdef\@mail{#1}} +\def\@mail{} + +\def\@thanks{} + +\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ifcase#1\or\star\or{\star\star}\or{\star\star\star}% + \or \dagger\or \ddagger\or + \mathchar "278\or \mathchar "27B\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi\relax} + +\def\inst#1{\unskip$^{#1}$} +\def\fnmsep{\unskip$^,$} + +\def\subtitle#1{\gdef\@subtitle{#1}} +\def\@subtitle{} + +\def\headnote#1{\gdef\@headnote{#1}} +\def\@headnote{} + +\def\ch@ckobl#1#2{\@ifundefined{@#1} + {\typeout{SVJour warning: Missing +\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}% + \csname #1\endcsname{#2}} + {}} +% +\def\ProcessRunnHead{% + \def\\{\unskip\ \ignorespaces}\def\inst##1{\unskip{}}% + \def\thanks##1{\unskip{}}\def\fnmsep{\unskip}% + \instindent=\textwidth + \advance\instindent by-\headlineindent + \if!\the\titlerunning!\else + \edef\@title{\the\titlerunning}% + \fi + \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily\unboldmath\ignorespaces\@title + \unskip}% + \ifdim\wd\titrun>\instindent + \typeout{^^JSVJour Warning: Title too long for running head.}% + \typeout{Please supply a shorter form with \string\titlerunning + \space prior to \string\maketitle}% + \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily + Title Suppressed Due to Excessive Length}% + \fi + \xdef\@title{\copy\titrun}% +% + \if!\the\authorrunning! + \else + \setcounter{auth}{1}% + \edef\@author{\the\authorrunning}% + \fi + \ifnum\value{auth}>\authdepth + \def\stripauthor##1\and##2\endauthor{% + \protected@xdef\@author{##1\unskip\unskip\if!##2!\else\ et al.\fi}}% + \expandafter\stripauthor\@author\and\endauthor + \else + \gdef\and{\unskip, \ignorespaces}% + {\def\and{\noexpand\protect\noexpand\and}% + \protected@xdef\@author{\@author}} + \fi + \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily\unboldmath\ignorespaces + \@author\unskip}% + \ifdim\wd\authrun>\instindent + \typeout{^^JSVJour Warning: Author name(s) too long for running head. + ^^JPlease supply a shorter form with \string\authorrunning + \space prior to \string\maketitle}% + \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily Please give a shorter version + with: {\tt\string\authorrunning\space and + \string\titlerunning\space prior to \string\maketitle}}% + \fi + \xdef\@author{\copy\authrun}% + \markboth{\@author}{\@title}% +} +% +\def\maketitle{\par +\ch@ckobl{journalname}{Noname} +\ch@ckobl{date}{The date of receipt and acceptance will be inserted by +the editor} +\ch@ckobl{title}{A title should be given} +\ch@ckobl{author}{Name(s) and initial(s) of author(s) should be given} +\ch@ckobl{institute}{Address(es) of author(s) should be given} +\begingroup +% + \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}% + \def\@makefnmark{$^{\@thefnmark}$}% +% + \def\lastand{\ifnum\value{inst}=2\relax + \unskip{} \andname\ + \else + \unskip, \andname\ + \fi}% + \def\and{\stepcounter{auth}\relax + \if@smartand + \ifnum\value{auth}=\value{inst}% + \lastand + \else + \unskip, + \fi + \else + \unskip, + \fi}% + \ifnum \col@number=\@ne + \@maketitle + \else + \twocolumn[\@maketitle]% + \fi + \thispagestyle{empty} + \global\@topnum\z@ + \@thanks + \if!\@mail!\else + \footnotetext[0]{\kern-\bibindent\mailname\ + \ignorespaces\@mail}% + \fi +% + \if@runhead + \ProcessRunnHead + \if@smartrunh + \instindent=\textwidth + \advance\instindent by-\headlineindent + \if!\@combi!% + \global\setbox\combirun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily\unboldmath\ignorespaces + \@author\unskip: \@title\unskip}% + \def\@tempa{Automatically generated running head}% + \else + \global\setbox\combirun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily\unboldmath\ignorespaces + \@combi\unskip}% + \def\@tempa{With \string\combirunning\space supplied running head}% + \fi + \ifdim\wd\combirun>\instindent + \typeout{^^JSVJour Warning: \@tempa}% + \typeout{for a possible last even numbered page is too long.}% + \typeout{Please supply a shorter form with \string\combirunning + \space prior to \string\maketitle.}% + \global\setbox\combirun=\hbox{\small\rmfamily + Title Suppressed Due to Excessive Length -- + supply \ttfamily\char92combirunning}% + \fi + \xdef\lastevenhead{\copy\combirun}% + \fi + \fi +% + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0} + \global\let\thanks\relax + \global\let\maketitle\relax + \global\let\@maketitle\relax + \global\let\@thanks\@empty + \global\let\@author\@empty + \global\let\@date\@empty + \global\let\@title\@empty + \global\let\@subtitle\@empty + \global\let\title\relax + \global\let\author\relax + \global\let\date\relax + \global\let\and\relax} + +\def\makeheadbox{{% +\hbox to0pt{\vbox{\baselineskip=10dd\hrule\hbox +to\hsize{\vrule\kern3pt\vbox{\kern3pt +\hbox{\bfseries\@journalname\ manuscript No.} +\hbox{(will be inserted by the editor)} +\kern3pt}\hfil\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}% +\hss}}} + +\def\@maketitle{\newpage + \normalfont + \vbox to0pt{\vskip-40pt + \nointerlineskip + \makeheadbox\vss}\nointerlineskip + \setbox\authrun=\vbox\bgroup + {\Large \bfseries\boldmath + \hrule\@height\logodepth\@width\z@ + \pretolerance=10000 + \rightskip=0pt plus 4cm + \if!\@headnote!\else + \noindent + {\normalfont\em\ignorespaces\@headnote\par}\vskip 3.5mm + \fi + \noindent\ignorespaces + \@title \par}\vskip 11.24pt\relax + \if!\@subtitle!\else + {\large\bfseries\boldmath + \pretolerance=10000 + \rightskip=0pt plus 3cm + \noindent\ignorespaces\@subtitle \par}\vskip 11.24pt + \fi + \normalfont\authorfont + \lineskip .5em + \setbox0=\vbox{\setcounter{auth}{1}\def\and{\stepcounter{auth} }% + \hfuzz=2\textwidth\def\thanks##1{}\@author}% + \value{inst}=\value{auth}% + \setcounter{auth}{1}% + \rightskip=0pt plus 2cm + \noindent\ignorespaces\@author\vskip7.23pt + \rightskip=0pt\relax + \normalfont\small\rmfamily + \institutename + \vskip 12.85pt \noindent\@date + \if!\@dedic!\else + \par + \small\itshape + \addvspace\baselineskip + \noindent\@dedic + \fi + \egroup % end of header box + \@tempdima=\headerboxheight + \advance\@tempdima by-\ht\authrun + \ifdim\@tempdima>0pt + \vrule width0pt height\@tempdima + \fi + \unvbox\authrun + \global\@minipagetrue + \global\everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\global\everypar{}} + \vskip22.47pt +} +% +\if@mathematic + \def\vec#1{\ensuremath{\mathchoice + {\mbox{\boldmath$\displaystyle\mathbf{#1}$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\textstyle\mathbf{#1}$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptstyle\mathbf{#1}$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptscriptstyle\mathbf{#1}$}}}} +\else + \def\vec#1{\ensuremath{\mathchoice + {\mbox{\boldmath$\displaystyle#1$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\textstyle#1$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptstyle#1$}} + {\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}}} +\fi +% +\def\tens#1{\ensuremath{\mathsf{#1}}} +% +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\newcounter {section} +\newcounter {subsection}[section] +\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection] +\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph] +\renewcommand\thesection {\@arabic\c@section} +\renewcommand\thesubsection {\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection} +\renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection} +\renewcommand\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph} +\renewcommand\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph} +% +\def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}% + \hangindent \z@\noindent\box\@tempboxa} + +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\sectcounterend +\hskip\betweenumberspace} + +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + #6{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% + \raggedright + \hyphenpenalty \@M% + \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname\sectcounterend}% + \fi + #7}% + \else + \def\@svsechd{% + #6{\hskip #3\relax + \@svsec #8\hskip\aftertext}% + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}}% + \fi + \@xsect{#5}} + +% +% measures and setting of sections +% +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}% + {-21dd plus-4pt minus-4pt}{10.5dd plus 4pt + minus4pt}{\normalsize\bfseries\boldmath}} +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}% + {-21dd plus-4pt minus-4pt}{10.5dd plus 4pt + minus4pt}{\normalsize\itshape}} +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}% + {-13dd plus-4pt minus-4pt}{-5.5pt}{\normalsize\itshape}} +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}% + {-13pt plus-4pt minus-4pt}{-5.5pt}{\normalsize\itshape}} + +\setlength\leftmargini {\parindent} +\leftmargin \leftmargini +\setlength\leftmarginii {\parindent} +\setlength\leftmarginiii {1.87em} +\setlength\leftmarginiv {1.7em} +\setlength\leftmarginv {.5em} +\setlength\leftmarginvi {.5em} +\setlength \labelsep {.5em} +\setlength \labelwidth{\leftmargini} +\addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep} +\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty +\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty +\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty +\renewcommand\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi} +\renewcommand\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii} +\renewcommand\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii} +\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv} +\newcommand\labelenumi{\theenumi.} +\newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)} +\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} +\newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.} +\renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} +\newcommand\labelitemi{\normalfont\bfseries --} +\newcommand\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries --} +\newcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\bullet$} +\newcommand\labelitemiv{$\m@th\cdot$} + +\if@spthms +% definition of the "\spnewtheorem" command. +% +% Usage: +% +% \spnewtheorem{env_nam}{caption}[within]{cap_font}{body_font} +% or \spnewtheorem{env_nam}[numbered_like]{caption}{cap_font}{body_font} +% or \spnewtheorem*{env_nam}{caption}{cap_font}{body_font} +% +% New is "cap_font" and "body_font". It stands for +% fontdefinition of the caption and the text itself. +% +% "\spnewtheorem*" gives a theorem without number. +% +% A defined spnewthoerem environment is used as described +% by Lamport. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@thmcountersep{} +\def\@thmcounterend{} +\newdimen\spthmsep \spthmsep=3pt + +\def\spnewtheorem{\@ifstar{\@sthm}{\@Sthm}} + +% definition of \spnewtheorem with number + +\def\@spnthm#1#2{% + \@ifnextchar[{\@spxnthm{#1}{#2}}{\@spynthm{#1}{#2}}} +\def\@Sthm#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@spothm{#1}}{\@spnthm{#1}}} + +\def\@spxnthm#1#2[#3]#4#5{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\expandafter\noexpand + \csname the#3\endcsname \noexpand\@thmcountersep \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}% + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + +\def\@spynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}% + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + +\def\@spothm#1[#2]#3#4#5{% + \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@latexerr{No theorem environment `#2' defined}\@eha}% + {\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\global\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#3}% + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#2}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}} + +\def\@spthm#1#2#3#4{\topsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ +\labelsep=\spthmsep\refstepcounter{#1}% +\@ifnextchar[{\@spythm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}{\@spxthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} + +\def\@spxthm#1#2#3#4{\@spbegintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#3}{#4}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def\@spythm#1#2#3#4[#5]{\@spopargbegintheorem{#2}{\csname + the#1\endcsname}{#5}{#3}{#4}\ignorespaces} + +\def\@spbegintheorem#1#2#3#4{\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1\ #2\@thmcounterend}]#4} + +\def\@spopargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4#5{\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{#4#1\ #2}]{#4(#3)\@thmcounterend\ }#5} + +% definition of \spnewtheorem* without number + +\def\@sthm#1#2{\@Ynthm{#1}{#2}} + +\def\@Ynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\global\@namedef{#1}{\@Thm{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + +\def\@Thm#1#2#3{\topsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ +\@ifnextchar[{\@Ythm{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@Xthm{#1}{#2}{#3}}} + +\def\@Xthm#1#2#3{\@Begintheorem{#1}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces} + +\def\@Ythm#1#2#3[#4]{\@Opargbegintheorem{#1} + {#4}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces} + +\def\@Begintheorem#1#2#3{#3\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{#2#1\@thmcounterend}]} + +\def\@Opargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4{#4\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1}]{#3(#2)\@thmcounterend\ }} + +\if@envcntsect + \def\@thmcountersep{.} + \spnewtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section]{\bfseries}{\itshape} +\else + \spnewtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}{\bfseries}{\itshape} + \if@envcntreset + \@addtoreset{theorem}{section} + \else + \@addtoreset{theorem}{chapter} + \fi +\fi + +%definition of divers theorem environments +\spnewtheorem*{claim}{Claim}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spnewtheorem*{proof}{Proof}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\if@envcntsame % alle Umgebungen wie Theorem. + \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spothm{#1}[theorem]{#2}{#3}{#4}} +\else % alle Umgebungen mit eigenem Zaehler + \if@envcntsect % mit section numeriert + \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spxnthm{#1}{#2}[section]{#3}{#4}} + \else % nicht mit section numeriert + \if@envcntreset + \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spynthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} + \@addtoreset{#1}{section}} + \else + \let\spn@wtheorem=\@spynthm + \fi + \fi +\fi +\spn@wtheorem{case}{Case}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{conjecture}{Conjecture}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{corollary}{Corollary}{\bfseries}{\itshape} +\spn@wtheorem{definition}{Definition}{\bfseries}{\itshape} +\spn@wtheorem{example}{Example}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{exercise}{Exercise}{\bfseries}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{lemma}{Lemma}{\bfseries}{\itshape} +\spn@wtheorem{note}{Note}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{problem}{Problem}{\bfseries}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{property}{Property}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{proposition}{Proposition}{\bfseries}{\itshape} +\spn@wtheorem{question}{Question}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{solution}{Solution}{\bfseries}{\rmfamily} +\spn@wtheorem{remark}{Remark}{\itshape}{\rmfamily} +% +\newenvironment{theopargself} + {\def\@spopargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4##5{\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{##4##1\ ##2}]{##4##3\@thmcounterend\ }##5} + \def\@Opargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4{##4\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{##3##1}]{##3##2\@thmcounterend\ }}}{} +\newenvironment{theopargself*} + {\def\@spopargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4##5{\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{##4##1\ ##2}]{\hspace*{-\labelsep}##4##3\@thmcounterend}##5} + \def\@Opargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4{##4\trivlist + \item[\hskip\labelsep{##3##1}]{\hspace*{-\labelsep}##3##2\@thmcounterend}}}{} +\fi + +\def\@takefromreset#1#2{% + \def\@tempa{#1}% + \let\@tempd\@elt + \def\@elt##1{% + \def\@tempb{##1}% + \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\else + \@addtoreset{##1}{#2}% + \fi}% + \expandafter\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempc\csname cl@#2\endcsname + \expandafter\def\csname cl@#2\endcsname{}% + \@tempc + \let\@elt\@tempd} + +\def\squareforqed{\hbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}} +\def\qed{\ifmmode\else\unskip\quad\fi\squareforqed} +\def\smartqed{\def\qed{\ifmmode\squareforqed\else{\unskip\nobreak\hfil +\penalty50\hskip1em\null\nobreak\hfil\squareforqed +\parfillskip=0pt\finalhyphendemerits=0\endgraf}\fi}} + +% Define `abstract' environment +\def\abstract{\topsep=0pt\partopsep=0pt\parsep=0pt\itemsep=0pt\relax +\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep +{\bfseries\abstractname}]\if!\abstractname!\hskip-\labelsep\fi} +\if@twocolumn + \def\endabstract{\endtrivlist\addvspace{5mm}\strich} + \def\strich{\hrule\vskip3ptplus12pt\null} +\else + \def\endabstract{\endtrivlist\addvspace{3mm}} +\fi +% +\newenvironment{verse} + {\let\\\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep \z@ + \itemindent -1.5em% + \listparindent\itemindent + \rightmargin \leftmargin + \advance\leftmargin 1.5em}% + \item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quotation} + {\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em% + \itemindent \listparindent + \rightmargin \leftmargin + \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}% + \item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quote} + {\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}% + \item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newcommand\appendix{\par + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}} +\setlength\arraycolsep{1.5\p@} +\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@} +\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@} +\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@} +\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep} +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@} +\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@} +\renewcommand\theequation{\@arabic\c@equation} +\newcounter{figure} +\renewcommand\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} +\newenvironment{figure} + {\@float{figure}} + {\end@float} +\newenvironment{figure*} + {\@dblfloat{figure}} + {\end@dblfloat} +\newcounter{table} +\renewcommand\thetable{\@arabic\c@table} +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} +\newenvironment{table} + {\@float{table}} + {\end@float} +\newenvironment{table*} + {\@dblfloat{table}} + {\end@dblfloat} + +\def \@floatboxreset {% + \reset@font + \small + \@setnobreak + \@setminipage +} + +\newlength\abovecaptionskip +\newlength\belowcaptionskip +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@} +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0\p@} +\newcommand\leftlegendglue{} + +\def\fig@type{figure} + +\newdimen\figcapgap\figcapgap=3pt +\newdimen\tabcapgap\tabcapgap=5.5pt + +\@ifundefined{floatlegendstyle}{\def\floatlegendstyle{\bfseries}}{} + +\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname + ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname + the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup + \@parboxrestore + \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par + \endgroup} + +\def\capstrut{\vrule\@width\z@\@height\topskip} + +\@ifundefined{captionstyle}{\def\captionstyle{\normalfont\small}}{} + +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% + \captionstyle + \ifx\@captype\fig@type + \vskip\figcapgap + \fi + \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{\floatlegendstyle #1\floatcounterend}% + \capstrut #2}% + \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize + {\floatlegendstyle #1\floatcounterend}\capstrut #2\par + \else + \hbox to\hsize{\leftlegendglue\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}% + \fi + \ifx\@captype\fig@type\else + \vskip\tabcapgap + \fi} + +\newdimen\figgap\figgap=1cc +\long\def\@makesidecaption#1#2{% + \parbox[b]{\@tempdima}{\captionstyle{\floatlegendstyle + #1\floatcounterend}#2}} +\def\sidecaption#1\caption{% +\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{#1\unskip}% +\if@twocolumn + \ifdim\hsize<\textwidth\else + \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\columnwidth + \typeout{Double column float fits into single column - + ^^Jyou'd better switch the environment. }% + \fi + \fi +\fi +\@tempdima=\hsize +\advance\@tempdima by-\figgap +\advance\@tempdima by-\wd\@tempboxa +\ifdim\@tempdima<3cm + \typeout{\string\sidecaption: No sufficient room for the legend; + using normal \string\caption. }% + \unhbox\@tempboxa + \let\@capcommand=\@caption +\else + \let\@capcommand=\@sidecaption + \leavevmode + \unhbox\@tempboxa + \hfill +\fi +\refstepcounter\@captype +\@dblarg{\@capcommand\@captype}} + +\long\def\@sidecaption#1[#2]#3{\addcontentsline{\csname + ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname + the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup + \@parboxrestore + \@makesidecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par + \endgroup} + +% Define `acknowledgement' environment +\def\acknowledgement{\par\addvspace{17pt}\small\rmfamily +\trivlist\if!\ackname!\item[]\else +\item[\hskip\labelsep +{\it\ackname}]\fi} +\def\endacknowledgement{\endtrivlist\addvspace{6pt}} +% Define `noteadd' environment +\def\noteadd{\par\addvspace{17pt}\small\rmfamily +\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep +{\itshape\noteaddname}]} +\def\endnoteadd{\endtrivlist\addvspace{6pt}} + +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} +\newcommand\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\newcommand\@tocrmarg{2.55em} +\newcommand\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{1} +\newcommand\tableofcontents{% + \section*{\contentsname}% + \@starttoc{toc}% + \addtocontents{toc}{\begingroup\protect\small}% + \AtEndDocument{\addtocontents{toc}{\endgroup}}% + } +\newcommand*\l@part[2]{% + \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax + \addpenalty\@secpenalty + \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% + \begingroup + \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + {\leavevmode + \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par + \nobreak + \if@compatibility + \global\@nobreaktrue + \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}% + \fi + \endgroup + \fi} +\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{0pt}{1.5em}} +\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}} +\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}} +\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}} +\newcommand\listoffigures{% + \section*{\listfigurename + \@mkboth{\listfigurename}% + {\listfigurename}}% + \@starttoc{lof}% + } +\newcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\newcommand\listoftables{% + \section*{\listtablename + \@mkboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}% + \@starttoc{lot}% + } +\let\l@table\l@figure +\newdimen\bibindent +\setlength\bibindent{\parindent} +\def\@biblabel#1{#1.} +\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[{[#1]}\hfill]\if@filesw + {\let\protect\noexpand + \immediate + \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces} +\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1] + {\section*{\refname + \@mkboth{\refname}{\refname}}\small + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep + \@openbib@code + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% + \sfcode`\.\@m} + {\def\@noitemerr + {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% + \endlist} +% +\newcount\@tempcntc +\def\@citex[#1]#2{\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#2}}\fi + \@tempcnta\z@\@tempcntb\m@ne\def\@citea{}\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@ifundefined + {b@\@citeb}{\@citeo\@tempcntb\m@ne\@citea\def\@citea{,}{\bfseries + ?}\@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% + {\setbox\z@\hbox{\global\@tempcntc0\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname\relax}% + \ifnum\@tempcntc=\z@ \@citeo\@tempcntb\m@ne + \@citea\def\@citea{,\hskip0.1em\ignorespaces}\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}% + \else + \advance\@tempcntb\@ne + \ifnum\@tempcntb=\@tempcntc + \else\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne\@citeo + \@tempcnta\@tempcntc\@tempcntb\@tempcntc\fi\fi}}\@citeo}{#1}} +\def\@citeo{\ifnum\@tempcnta>\@tempcntb\else + \@citea\def\@citea{,\hskip0.1em\ignorespaces}% + \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb\the\@tempcnta\else + {\advance\@tempcnta\@ne\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb \else \def\@citea{--}\fi + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne\the\@tempcnta\@citea\the\@tempcntb}\fi\fi} +% +\newcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} +\let\@openbib@code\@empty +\newenvironment{theindex} + {\if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]% + \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem} + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@} +\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}} +\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}} +\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax} +\renewcommand\footnoterule{% + \kern-3\p@ + \hrule\@width.4\columnwidth + \kern2.6\p@} +\newcommand\@makefntext[1]{% + \noindent + \hb@xt@\bibindent{\hss\@makefnmark\enspace}#1} +% +\newcommand\contentsname{Contents} +\newcommand\listfigurename{List of Figures} +\newcommand\listtablename{List of Tables} +\newcommand\refname{References} +\newcommand\indexname{Index} +\newcommand\figurename{Fig.} +\newcommand\tablename{Table} +\newcommand\partname{Part} +\newcommand\appendixname{Appendix} +\newcommand\abstractname{Abstract\runinend} +\newcommand\ackname{Acknowledgements\runinend} +\newcommand\noteaddname{Note added in proof} +% French section +\def\ds@francais{% + \typeout{On parle francais.}% + \def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e\runinend}% + \def\ackname{Remerciements\runinend}% + \def\andname{et}% + \def\lastandname{ et}% + \def\appendixname{Appendice} + \def\chaptername{Chapitre}% + \def\claimname{Pr\'etention}% + \def\conjecturename{Hypoth\`ese}% + \def\contentsname{Table des mati\`eres}% + \def\corollaryname{Corollaire}% + \def\definitionname{D\'efinition}% + \def\examplename{Exemple}% + \def\exercisename{Exercice}% + \def\figurename{Fig.}% + \def\keywordname{{\bfseries Mots-cl\'e\runinend}} + \def\indexname{Index} + \def\lemmaname{Lemme}% + \def\contriblistname{Liste des contributeurs} + \def\listfigurename{Liste des figures}% + \def\listtablename{Liste des tables}% + \def\mailname{{\itshape Correspondence to\/}:} + \def\noteaddname{Note ajout\'ee \`a l'\'epreuve}% + \def\notename{Remarque}% + \def\partname{Partie}% + \def\problemname{Probl\`eme}% + \def\proofname{\'Epreuve}% + \def\propertyname{Caract\'eristique}% +%\def\propositionname{Proposition}% + \def\questionname{Question}% +%\def\refname{References}% + \def\remarkname{Remarque}% + \def\seename{voyez} + \def\solutionname{Solution}% +%\def\subclassname{{\it Subject Classifications\/}:} + \def\tablename{Tableau}% + \def\theoremname{Th\'eor\`eme}% +} +% +% German section +\def\ds@deutsch{\typeout{Man spricht deutsch.}% + \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung\runinend}% + \def\ackname{Danksagung\runinend}% + \def\andname{und}% + \def\lastandname{ und}% + \def\appendixname{Anhang}% + \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% + \def\claimname{Behauptung}% + \def\conjecturename{Hypothese}% + \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% + \def\corollaryname{Korollar}% +%\def\definitionname{Definition}% + \def\examplename{Beispiel}% + \def\exercisename{\"Ubung}% + \def\figurename{Abb.}% + \def\keywordname{{\bfseries Schl\"usselw\"orter\runinend}} + \def\indexname{Index} +%\def\lemmaname{Lemma}% + \def\contriblistname{Mitarbeiter} + \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% + \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}% + \def\mailname{{\itshape Correspondence to\/}:} + \def\noteaddname{Nachtrag}% + \def\notename{Anmerkung}% + \def\partname{Teil}% +%\def\problemname{Problem}% + \def\proofname{Beweis}% + \def\propertyname{Eigenschaft}% +%\def\propositionname{Proposition}% + \def\questionname{Frage}% + \def\refname{Literatur}% + \def\remarkname{Anmerkung}% + \def\seename{siehe} + \def\solutionname{L\"osung}% +%\def\subclassname{{\it Subject Classifications\/}:} + \def\tablename{Tabelle}% +%\def\theoremname{Theorem}% +} +\AtBeginDocument{\switch@texts} +\newcommand\today{} +\edef\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} +\setlength\columnsep{1.5cc} +\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@} +% +\frenchspacing +\clubpenalty=10000 +\widowpenalty=10000 +\def\thisbottomragged{\def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil +\global\let\@textbottom\relax}} +\pagestyle{headings} +\pagenumbering{arabic} +\if@twocolumn + \twocolumn +\fi +\if@referee + \makereferee +\fi +\flushbottom +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `svjour.cls'. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/template.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/template.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4da231d63c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/template.tex @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% file template.tex %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% This is a template file for Acta Informatica +% +% Copy it to a new file with a new name and use it as the basis +% for your article +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Springer-Verlag %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% First comes an example EPS file -- just ignore it and +% proceed on the \documentclass line +\begin{filecontents*}{example.eps} +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 19 19 221 221 +%%CreationDate: Mon Sep 29 1997 +%%Creator: programmed by hand (JK) +%%EndComments +gsave +newpath + 20 20 moveto + 20 220 lineto + 220 220 lineto + 220 20 lineto +closepath +2 setlinewidth +gsave + .4 setgray fill +grestore +stroke +grestore +\end{filecontents*} +% +\documentclass[actinf,referee]{svjour} +% Remove option referee for final version +% +% Remove any % below to load the required packages +%\usepackage{latexsym} +\usepackage{graphics} +% etc +% +\begin{document} +% +\title{Insert your title here} +\subtitle{Do you have a subtitle?\\ If so, write it here} +\author{First author\inst{1} \and Second author\inst{2}% etc +% \thanks is optional - remove next line if not needed +\thanks{\emph{Present address:} Insert the address here if needed}% +} % Do not remove +% +\offprints{} % Insert a name or remove this line +% +\institute{Insert the first address here \and the second here} +% +\date{Received: date / Revised version: date} +% The correct dates will be entered by the editor +% +\maketitle +% +\begin{abstract} +Insert your abstract here. +\end{abstract} +% +\section{Introduction} +\label{intro} +Your text comes here. Separate text sections with +\section{Section title} +\label{sec:1} +and \cite{RefJ} +\subsection{Subsection title} +\label{sec:2} +as required. Don't forget to give each section +and subsection a unique label (see Sect.~\ref{sec:1}). +% +% For one-column wide figures use +\begin{figure} +% Use the relevant command for your figure-insertion program +% to insert the figure file. +% For example, with the option graphics use +\resizebox{0.75\textwidth}{!}{% + \includegraphics{example.eps} +} +% If not, use +%\vspace{5cm} % Give the correct figure height in cm +\caption{Please write your figure caption here} +\label{fig:1} % Give a unique label +\end{figure} +% +% For two-column wide figures use +\begin{figure*} +% Use the relevant command for your figure-insertion program +% to insert the figure file. See example above. +% If not, use +\vspace*{5cm} % Give the correct figure height in cm +\caption{Please write your figure caption here} +\label{fig:2} % Give a unique label +\end{figure*} +% +% For tables use +\begin{table} +\caption{Please write your table caption here} +\label{tab:1} % Give a unique label +% For LaTeX tables use +\begin{tabular}{lll} +\hline\noalign{\smallskip} +first & second & third \\ +\noalign{\smallskip}\hline\noalign{\smallskip} +number & number & number \\ +number & number & number \\ +\noalign{\smallskip}\hline +\end{tabular} +% Or use +\vspace*{5cm} % with the correct table height +\end{table} +% +% BibTeX users please use +% \bibliographystyle{} +% \bibliography{} +% +% Non-BibTeX users please use +\begin{thebibliography}{} +% +% and use \bibitem to create references. +% +\bibitem{RefJ} +% Format for Journal Reference +Author, Journal \textbf{Volume,} (year) page numbers. +% Format for books +\bibitem{RefB} +Author, \textit{Book title} (Publisher, place year) page numbers +% etc +\end{thebibliography} + + +\end{document} + +% end of file template.tex + diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.dvi b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.dvi new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ae17a15a32 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.dvi differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8bc08921cc Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/actinf/usrguide.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.dvi b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.dvi new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..828904a4d9 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.dvi differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a67975aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/agpguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass[final]{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] +%\usepackage{draftcopy} + +\makeatletter +\def\setitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}% + \leftmargini\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargini\labelsep + \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep}} +\def\setitemitemindent#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}% + \leftmarginii\labelwidth + \advance\leftmarginii\labelsep +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii + \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth by -\labelsep + \parsep=\parskip + \topsep=\z@ + \itemsep=\parskip \advance\itemsep by -\parsep}} +% +% adjusted environment "description" +% if an optional parameter (at the first two levels of lists) +% is present, its width is considered to be the widest mark +% throughout the current list. +\def\description{\@ifnextchar[{\@describe}{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ + \itemindent-\leftmargin \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}} +% +\def\describelabel#1{#1\hfil} +\def\@describe[#1]{\relax\ifnum\@listdepth=0 +\setitemindent{#1}\else\ifnum\@listdepth=1 +\setitemitemindent{#1}\fi\fi +\list{--}{\let\makelabel\describelabel}} +\DeleteShortVerb{\|} +\renewenvironment{decl}[1][]% + {\par\small\addvspace{2.3ex}% + \vskip -\parskip + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \def\@decl@date{}% + \else + \def\@decl@date{\NEWfeature{#1}}% + \fi + \noindent\hspace{-\leftmargini}% + \begin{tabular}{|l|}\hline\ignorespaces}% + {\\\hline\end{tabular}\nobreak\@decl@date\par\nobreak + \vspace{2.3ex plus 1ex}\vskip -\parskip} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} +% +\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \parskip 0\p@ \@plus 1\p@ + \parsep 0\p@ \@plus\p@ + \topsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ + \itemsep0\p@\relax} +\@listI +\setlength{\parskip}{\medskipamount} +\makeatother +\newcommand{\SJour}{\textsc{SVJour}} + +\title{The \SJour\ document class users guide\\supplement for\\ +\textit{Annales Geophysicae}} + +\author{\copyright~1999, Springer Verlag Heidelberg\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{05 January 1999} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} +This document describes the \textit{agp} option for the +\SJour\ \LaTeXe\ document class. For details on +manuscript handling and the review process we refer to the +\emph{Instructions for authors} in the printed journal. For style +matters please consult previous issues of the journal. + +\section{Initializing the class} +\label{sec:opt} + +As explained in the main \emph{Users guide} you can +begin a document for \emph{Annales Geophysicae} by including +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[agp]{svjour} +\end{verbatim} +as the first line in your text. All other options are also described in +the main \emph{User guide}. + +\section{Changes to the \SJour\ class standard} + +As the abstract of your article is to appear in the header section, +it must be coded before the \verb|\maketitle| command. Do not use the +\verb|\begin{abstract}| \dots \verb|\end{abstract}| environment of +standard \LaTeX. Instead proceed as you do for the other +front matter declarations: +\begin{decl} +|\abstract| \arg{Text of your abstract} +\end{decl} +The standard key words are also part of the frontmatter please code +them at the end but still inside the \verb|\abstract{...}| area. + +\section{Changed bibliographic environment\\ +for {\tt natbib} usage} + +\subsection*{Overview} + +The {\tt natbib}\footnote{Natbib coding copyright (C) 1994--1998 Patrick +W. Daly. This file may be used for non-profit purposes. It may not be +distributed in exchange for money, other than distribution costs.} +package is a reimplementation of the \LaTeX\ \verb|\cite|\ +command, to work with author-year citations. It is compatible with the +standard bibliographic style files, such as {\tt plain.bst}, as well as +ith those of {\tt harvard, apalike, chicago, astron, authordate}, and of +course {\tt natbib}. + +\subsection*{Loading} + +A Loading with \verb|\usepackage[|{\it options}\verb|]{natbib}| is not +needed. All {\tt natbib} options and citations styles are implemented +for usage with the {\tt agp}-option. + +\subsection*{Basic commands} + +The {\tt natbib} package has two basic citation commands, \verb|\citet| +and \verb|\citep| for {\it textual} and {\it parenthetical} citations, +respectively. All of these may take one or two optional arguments to add +some text before and after the citation. + +\begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{10pt}$\Rightarrow$\hspace{10pt}}l} +\verb|\citet{jon90}| &Jones et al. (1990)\\ +\verb|\citet[chap.~2]{jon90}| &Jones et al. (1990, chap. 2)\\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\verb|\citep{jon90}| &(Jones et al., 1990)\\ +\verb|\citep[chap.~2]{jon90}| &(Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)\\ +\verb|\citep[see][]{jon90}| &(see Jones et al., 1990)\\ +\verb|\citep[see][chap.~2]{jon90}| &(see Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)\\ +\end{tabular} + +\subsection*{Multiple citations} + +Multiple citations may be made as usual, by including more than one citation +key in the \verb|\cite| command argument. + +\begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{10pt}$\Rightarrow$\hspace{10pt}}l} +\verb|\citet{jon90,jon91}| &Jones et al. (1990); James et al. (1991)\\ +\verb|\citep{jon90,jam91}| &(Jones et al., 1990; James et al. 1991)\\ +\verb|\citep{jon90,jon91}| &(Jones et al., 1990, 1991)\\ +\verb|\citep{jon90a,jon90b}| &(Jones et al., 1990a,b)\\ +\multicolumn{2}{c}{}\\ +\multicolumn{2}{c}{}\\ +\multicolumn{2}{c}{}\\ +\end{tabular} + +\subsection*{Bibliography} + +Use the \verb|\bibitem| macro in the following way: + +\begin{tabular}{l} +\verb|\bibitem[Jones \etal (1990)]{jon90} {\bf Jones ...|\\ +\verb|\bibitem[Jones \etal (1991)]{jon91} {\bf Jones ...|\\ +\verb|\bibitem[James \etal (1991)]{jam91} {\bf James ...|\\ +\end{tabular} + +\section{Changes using Postscript fonts} + +The journal `Annales Geophysicae' is typeset using the +Postscript\footnote{PostScript is a trademark of Adobe.} Times fonts for the +main text and math. As the use of PostScript fonts results in different line and page +breaks than when using Computer Modern fonts, we encourage you to use our +document class together with the psnfss package times and if available the +mathtime package. This packages does all necessary font replacements to show +you the page make-up as it will be printed. Ask your local \TeX pert for +details. PostScript previewing is possible on most systems. On some +installations, however, on-screen previewing may be possible only with +CM fonts. + +If, for technical reasons, you are not able to use the PS fonts, it is also +possible to use our document class together with the ordinary Computer Modern +fonts. Note, however, that in this case line and page breaks will change when +we re\TeX\ your file with PS fonts, making it necessary for you to check them +again once you receive the proofs from the printer. + + +\section{Notes} + +Again we strongly suggest to use the \verb|\bibitem - \cite| as well as +the \verb|\label -| \verb|\ref| mechanism of \LaTeX\ for your cross +references throughout your document. + +\section{Installation} + +Following packages should be installed: \verb|times|, \verb|natbib|, +\verb|amsmath|. + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.dvi b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.dvi new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cc385dd228 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.dvi differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90fc830bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/example/example.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1277 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% An example input file demonstrating the agp option of the SVJour % +% document class for the journal: Annales Geophysicae % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +\documentclass[agp]{svjour} + +\usepackage{graphics} +\usepackage{epsfig} +\usepackage{times} +% \usepackage{mathtime} +% +\sloppy +% +\journalname{Ann. Geophysicae} +% +\begin{document} +\title{On the regional climatic impact of contrails:} +\subtitle{microphysical and radiative properties of contrails and +natural cirrus clouds} +\author{B. Strauss\inst{1} \and +R. Meerkoetter\inst{1} \and +B. Wissinger\inst{1} \and +P. Wendling\inst{1} \and +M. Hess\inst{2}} +\institute{Deutsche Forschungsanstalt fuer Luft- und Raumfahrt (DLR), +Institut fuer Physik der Atmosphaere, Oberpfaffenhofen, D-82234 Wessling, +Germany +\and +Meteorologisches Institut der Universitaet Muenchen, Muenchen, Germany} +\mail{B. Strauss\\ +e-mail: pal3@opasul.pa.op.dir.de} +\date{Received: 17 November 1995 / Revised: 12 May 1997 / +Accepted: 6 June 1997} +\titlerunning{On the climatic impact of contrails} +\authorrunning{B. Strauss \etal} + +\maketitle + +\abstract{The impact of contrail induced cirrus clouds on regional +climate is estimated for mean atmospheric conditions of Southern Germany +in the months of July and October. This is done by use of a regionalized +one-dimensional radiative convective model (RCM). The influence of an +increased ice cloud cover is studied by comparing RCM results +representing climatological values with a modified case. In order to +study the sensitivity of this effect on the radiative characteristics of +the ice cloud, two types of additional ice clouds were modelled: cirrus +and contrails, the latter cloud type containing a higher number of +smaller and less of the larger cloud particles. Ice cloud parameters are +calculated on the basis of a particle size distribution which covers the +range from 2 to 2000\,$\mu$m\,, taking into consideration recent +measurements which show a remarkable amount of particles smaller than +20\,$\mu$m. It turns out that a 10\% increase in ice cloud cover leads +to a surface temperature increase in the order of 1\,K\,, ranging from +1.1 to 1.2\,K in July and from 0.8 to 0.9\,K in October depending on the +radiative characteristics of the air-traffic-induced ice clouds. +Modelling the current contrail cloud cover which is near 0.5\% over +Europe yields a surface temperature increase in the order of 0.05\,K. +\keywords{Insert keyword here}} + +\strich + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Section 1 %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:1} + +Air traffic influences the atmosphere through the emission of various +gases and particles. Among these, water vapour and aerosol particles +acting as cloud nuclei are of special interest because they support +cloud formation thus modifying an important climate factor. Therefore, +the impact of contrails, or better `air-traffic-induced cirrus clouds' +was discussed recently within the scope of air traffic and climate in +general \citep{Schu94}. \citet{Li90} studied the global influence of +contrails within a case study, using a two-dimensinal climate model. +They found an increase in surface temperature of 1\,K in the case of an +increase in cloud cover by 5\% between 20$^\circ$ and 70$^\circ$ N. +\citet{Po96} studied the influence of an increase in water vapour and in +cirrus cloud cover induced by air traffic using a three-dimensional GCM. +They showed that a significant climatic effect is more likely to occur +on the basis of contrail cloud cover rather than on the basis of +additional water vapour due to air traffic. The GCM results show an +increase in surface temperature of 1\,K at 50$^{\circ}$N for a contrail +cloud cover of 5\%. + +However, one may expect contrails to have a stronger impact on a +regional scale than on a global scale. To estimate this, a case study is +carried out within this paper for an area of increased air traffic in +southern Germany. This is done by use of a one-dimensional radiative +convective model (RCM), originally developed by \citet{Li83} and +modified to allow modelling of regional climate by taking into account +advection as a third energy flux besides radiation and convection. The +effects of an increased ice cloud cloud cover on the equilibrium +temperature profile of a mean July and October atmosphere were +simulated. + +\begin{figure*} +\sidecaption +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(12,7) +\framebox(12,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Ice replicator mounted on the DLR research aircraft `Falcon'} +\label{fig:1} +\end{figure*} + +Special emphasis is laid on the parameterization of the radiative +characteristics of ice clouds. There are two types of ice cloud used in +the model: cirrus and contrail. An increase in ice cloud cover is +modelled twice, using both cloud types, in order to estimate the +influence of the cloud radiative characteristics on the results. +Corresponding RCM input parameters are the transmittance and the +reflectance in the solar, and the emittance, the transmittance and the +reflectance in the terrestrial spectral range. Values of these +quantities are obtained by radiative transfer model (RTM) calculations. +Ice clouds in the model are assumed to consist of particles in the range +2--2000\,$\mu$m. The size distribution for particles smaller than +20\,$\mu$m is based on recent in situ measurements which are presented +in Sect.~\ref{sec:2}, for particles greater than 20\,$\mu$m a parameterization +of \citet{He84} is used. Contrails are assumed to consist of a larger +portion of smaller particles and less of the bigger ones compared to +natural cirrus clouds. The ice water content, however, is assumed to be +the same in both cloud types, for reasons of better comparability. It is +anticipated that the portion of small particles has an appreciable +influence on the radiative properties of ice clouds \citep{Ar94}. +Section~\ref{sec:3} describes the model modifications, Sect.~\ref{sec:4} +presents and discusses the resulting equilibrium temperature profiles. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Section 2 %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\section{Measurements of microphysical properties in cirrus clouds and +contrails} +\label{sec:2} + +In situ measurements by use of an ice replicator [built by J. Hallett, +Desert Research Institute (DRI), Reno, Nevada, USA] were carried out in +both natural cirrus and aged contrails. This was done within the +campaign `CIRRUS '92' organized by `Deutsche Forschungsanstalt f\"ur +Luft- und Raumfahrt' (DLR). It took place between 1 and 19 October 1992 +in South Germany. On 15 October measurements were taken in a natural +cirrostratus cloud located ahead of a frontal system related to a strong +low over Denmark. On 9 October measurements were taken in contrails with +ages in the order of half an hour embedded in arising cirrus. In this +case a high was located over Central Europe, a low over the +Mediterranean Sea and advection of warm air in southern Germany just +started from the south. A comparison of these two measurements is of +special interest with regard to a possible difference in the +microphysical behaviour of these two cloud types. The question of how +representative these two clouds were remains open up to now. + +The principle of the ice replicator (see Fig.~\ref{fig:1}) is quite easy: +the particles fly through an inlet situated at the tip of the +instrument, sized 2 $\times$ 7\,mm$^2$, and impact on a coated leader +film which is transported just behind that entrance. The impacts of the +particles are conserved in the coating and are analysed by microscopy, +digitization of the microscope pictures and image processing software. +Thus information on particle shapes, sizes, concentration and size +distribution is obtained. The lower resolution of the instrument is +about 4\,$\mu$m, depending on the quality of the coating which does not +always have the same characteristics. A source of uncertainty concerning +absolute particle numbers is the uncertainty due to the collection +efficiency for particles smaller than approximately 10\,$\mu$m, which is +not known accurately. Particles larger than approximately 100\,$\mu$m +normally break by impaction and information on these particles is +therefore weak. Regions showing fragments of broken particles were +excluded from evaluation. Nevertheless, there remains an uncertainty due +to misclassification of some broken material. This effect is contrary to +the collection efficiency effect. Figure~\ref{fig:2} shows eight size +distributions of the cirrus cloud measured on 15 October 1992 taken from +eight different parts of this cloud, thus representing a measure of the +natural variability. Also shown is a parameterization for cirrus cloud +particles larger than 20\,$\mu$m in size for temperatures of +$-55^{\circ}$C and $-40^{\circ}$C \citep{He84,Li92}. The temperature in +the cloud was about $-55$ to $-57^{\circ}$C. One can see three important +features: + +\begin{enumerate} +\item there are many `small' particles, i.e. particles smaller than about +20\,$\mu$m in size; +\item the measured size distributions coincide with the parameterization +of Heymsfield and Platt in the overlap size regime; +\item the variability is in the order of one magnitude. +\end{enumerate} + +\begin{figure} +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Size distributions in a cirrostratus cloud measured on 15 +October 1992 over Southern Germany. The eight curves represent eight +different parts of the cloud and thereby give a measure of the natural +variability. The two lines represent parameterizations for particles +larger than 20\,$\mu$m for $-55\,^{\circ}$C ({\it solid}) and +$-40\,^{\circ}$C ({\it dash -- three dots}) after Heymsfield and Platt +(1984)} +\label{fig:2} +\end{figure} + +The strong fluctuations at sizes larger than about 20$\mu$m are due to +the size of sampling volume which is comperatively small for particles +of this size regime. It is in the order of several thousand cm$^{3}$. +The collection efficiency is assumed to be 1 for all sizes, i.e. numbers +for particles smaller than approximately 10\,$\mu$m are probably +slightly underestimated. Integration gives a mean particle concentration +of 0.7\,cm$^{-3}$ with values ranging from 0.5 to 1.1\,cm$^{-3}$. + +These values can be compared to data obtained by measurements with a +Counterflow Virtual Impactor (CVI) in natural cirrus clouds, as +presented by \citet{St93}. The CVI detects ice particles up to +30\,$\mu$m by measuring the concentration of the nuclei and the ice +water content of the particles. CVI values range from 0.1 to +1\,cm$^{-3}$ and therefore confirm the replicator data. + +Figure~\ref{fig:3} shows the corresponding results for the aged contrails +on 9 October. The temperature in these contrails was between +$-37^{\circ}$C and $-45^{\circ}$C. The mean concentration value is found +to be 1.3\,cm$^{-3}$, again assuming a collection efficiency of 1, with +values ranging from 0.8 to 1.6\,cm$^{-3}$. A comparison of the two +clouds is shown in Fig.~\ref{fig:4}. The two curves represent mean +values of the size distribution for the two cloud types. One can see +that the particle concentration for the aged contrails is larger for all +sizes measured by the ice replicator. But the difference is +significantly less than the variability of each of the two clouds. + +\begin{figure} +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Size distributions measured in aged contrails on 9 October 1992 +over Southern +Germany. Lines as in Fig.~\ref{fig:2}} +\label{fig:3} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure} +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Comparison of size distribution for natural cirrus (15 October 1992, +{\it thick}) and aged contrails (9 October 1992, {\it thin}). Lines as in +Fig.~\ref{fig:2}} +\label{fig:4} +\end{figure} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Section 3 %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\section{The radiative convective model and its modification} +\label{sec:3} + +The RCM output of the original model version represents an atmospheric +state of long-term and global averaging. It divides the atmosphere into +21 layers containing three cloud layers and calculates a temperature +profile representing an equilibrium state between radiation and +convection within each layer. The whole spectral range comprises six +spectral intervals in the solar and five intervals in the terrestrial +region. + +The temperature profile is computed on the basis of the Curtis matrix +principle, i.e. starting with an emittance, reflectance and +transmittance value and a first-guess temperature value for each +atmospheric model layer and then applying a perturbation scheme. This +immediately gives the equilibrium state temperature profile, i.e. no +time-stepping method is used. Values in cloudy layers are assumed to be +dominated by the cloud particles. Figure~\ref{fig:5} gives an overview of +the procedure. For more details see \citet{Li83}. + +\begin{figure*} +\sidecaption +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(12,7) +\framebox(12,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Flow diagram showing the principle procedure of the RCM. Each +iteration repeats the calculations of the vertical exchange coefficient +and of the profile of the radiative fluxes on the basis of the new +temperature profile. Advection is taken into consideration as a third +energy flux besides radiation and convection in the modified version of +the RCM which is used in this study} +\label{fig:5} +\end{figure*} + +To permit simulations on a regional scale and for limited time periods, +advection has to be taken into consideration. Furthermore, the following +variables have to be specified for the considered region and time: (1) +solar zenith angle, (2) water vapour profile, (3) ozone profile, (4) +cloud cover, (5) surface albedo, (6) Bowen ratio. + +All of these values except the cloud cover are assumed to be constant in +the frame of this study. Cloud cover values for mid-level and low clouds +are fixed, whereas high cloud cover is varied. More details are given in +Appendix~B. + +Special emphasis is given to the parameterization of the optical +properties of ice clouds. In the model's original version, ice clouds +consist of cylindrically shaped monodisperse ice particles with a mean +length of 200\,$\mu$m, a mean radius of 30\,$\mu$m and a mean +concentration of 0.05\,cm$^{-3}$. + +However, recent research results force these assumptions to be modified. +It turned out that models tend to underestimate the solar ice cloud +albedo when compared to measurements \citep{St91}. As a consequence, two +hypotheses are made to explain this discrepancy: in today's models, +particles are usually described as spheres or hexagons. Hypothesis (1) +says that particle shapes have to be modelled more precisely with +respect to multibranched particles which are regularly found in ice +clouds and which could cause increased backscattering as compared to +simple hexagonally shaped columns and plates \citep{Wi90}. Hypothesis +(2) concerns the particle size. Little is known about particles smaller +than 50\,$\mu$m due to the lower resolution of instruments usually +employed for in situ measurements of ice particles. Ice cloud models +usually assume particles with a minimum size of 20\,$\mu$m or even +larger. Hypothesis (2) says that a significant amount of smaller +particles have an appreciable influence on the radiative characteristics +of ice clouds by enlarging the number of backscattered photons and +herewith increasing cloud albedo. Model calculations +\citep{Ma93,Ia95,St96} make hypothesis (1) appear unlikely, whereas +recent in situ measurements as presented in the previous section support +hypothesis (2). Therefore, the ice cloud parameterization used in the +RCM was modified by assuming hexagonally shaped ice particles in the +solar spectral range, and cirrus particle size distributions in the +small-particle regime as based on our measurements (see Sect.~\ref{sec:2}) +and those of \citet{He84}. In the terrestrial spectral range, +Mie-calculations were carried out for volume equivalent spheres. + +The following two subsections describe the parameterization of the +optical properties of ice clouds and of the advection in detail. + +\subsection{Calculation of the radiative properties of ice clouds} + +\subsubsection{Procedure.} +% +Radiative properties of ice clouds in the RCM are described by the +broadband transmittance and reflectance in the solar spectral range and +in addition the emittance in the terrestrial spectral range. These +quantities were calculated with a separate radiation transfer model +(RTM) based on the Matrix Operator Method \citep{Pl73} by the following +steps: + +\begin{enumerate} +\item Calculation of the phase function $\phi$ (solar region), asymmetry +factor $g$ (terrestrial region), volume extinction coefficient $\sigma$, +and single scattering albedo $\omega$ on the basis of the particle-size +distribution and the spectral complex refractive index of ice \citep{Wa84}. +In the solar region these parameters are derived for hexagonally shaped +particles under the assumption of geometrical optics \citep{He94}. In the +terrestrial spectral range Mie-calculations have been performed for volume +equivalent spheres. +\item Calculation of spectral downward- and upward-directed radiative fluxes +at cloud top and base with an RTM. The ice cloud layer is embedded between +9.6 and 11.0\,km. +\item Calculation of broadband transmittance, reflectance and emittance by +use of wavelength integrated fluxes at cloud top and base within the solar +and terrestrial spectral range. +\end{enumerate} + +\begin{table}[b] +\caption[]{Modelled size distribution of cirrus cloud particles. The particle +concentration is 0.58\,cm$^{-3}$, the ice water content $2.077 \cdot +10^{-3}$\,gm$^{-3}$} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{-1.75pt}}lcccc} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +size class & represented size range & $A$ & $B$ & particle number \\ + & $\mu$m & $\mu$m & $\mu$m & m$^{-3}$ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +I & 2 -- 6 & \phantom{.}1.4 & \phantom{1.}3.5 & $1.69\cdot 10^5 $ \\ +II & \phantom{1}6 -- 20 & \phantom{11}4 & \phantom{11}10 & $3.87\cdot 10^5 $ \\ +III & 20 -- 40 & \phantom{1}10 & \phantom{11}30 & $1.77\cdot 10^4 $ \\ +IV & 40 -- 90 & \phantom{1}22 & \phantom{11}60 & $3.19\cdot 10^3 $ \\ +V & \phantom{1}90 -- 200 & \phantom{1}41 & 130 & $1.40\cdot 10^3 $ \\ +VI & 200 -- 400 & \phantom{1}60 & \phantom{1}300 & $1.75\cdot 10^2 $ \\ +VII & 400 -- 900 & \phantom{1}80 & \phantom{1}600 & $3.16\cdot 10^1 $ \\ +VIII & \phantom{1}900 -- 2000 & 110 & 1300 & $3.99\cdot 10^0 $ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:1} +\end{table} + +\subsubsection{Microphysical properties of cirrus and contrails.} +% +Size distributions are specified for two cloud types: cirrus and +contrails. Table~\ref{tab:1} gives the discretized cirrus size distribution +as derived from two separate data sources. A and B designate the half +width and the length of the representative hexagonal ice particles. For +cirrus cloud particles smaller than 20\,$\mu$m the size distribution is +based on in situ measurements as presented in Sect.~\ref{sec:2}. For cirrus +cloud particles larger than 20\,$\mu$m the size distribution is based on a +parameterization of \citet{He84} (using a revised version in +\citet{Li92}), which is a function of temperature. For reasons of +consistency, the range $-55^{\circ}$C to $-60^{\circ}$C is used here, +because temperature values within this range were measured during the +flight in the cloud on 15 October 1992. Taking the particle numbers of +\citet{He84,Li92} directly, however, leads to a significantly smaller +ice water content than that measured by these two papers, which is +$2.077 \cdot 10^{-3}$gm$^{-3}$. We assume that this discrepancy is due +to the assumption that particles in our model have hexagonal shapes in +all size classes, whereas the measurements show aggregates in the range +of larger particles. For a certain diameter, an aggregate contains a +significantly larger volume than a column. In order to adjust the ice +water content value in the model to the measured value, particle numbers +in size classes V to VIII were increased by a factor of 3.47. + +For consistency of the following comparison the ice water content within +contrails is assumed to be the same as that for the natural cirrus case. +Having no precise information on particle number densities for sizes +larger than 20\,$\mu$m, we assume that the relative particle size +distribution is the same as that for the natural cirrus case +(Table~\ref{tab:1}), through, with an upper size limit of 200\,$\mu$m. This +gives also qualitative agreement with the measurements of \citet{Ga96}. +As a result of the adjustment of the ice water content there are more +small particles in contrails than in natural cirrus, which is consistent +with our measurements. + +\begin{table} +\caption[]{Modeled size distribution of contrail particles. The particle +concentration is 1.0\,cm$^{-3}$, the ice water content $2.077 \cdot +10^{-3}$\,gm$^{-3}$} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{-1.75pt}}lcccc} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +size class & represented size range & $A$ & $B$ & particle number \\ +& $\mu$m & $\mu$m & $\mu$m & m$^{-3}$ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +I & 2 -- 6 & \phantom{.}1.4 & \phantom{.}3.5 & $2.91\cdot 10^5 $ \\ +II & \phantom{1}6 -- 20 & \phantom{11}4 & \phantom{11}10 & $6.67\cdot 10^5 $ \\ +III & 20 -- 40 & \phantom{1}10 & \phantom{11}30 & $3.05\cdot 10^4 $ \\ +IV & 40 -- 90 & \phantom{1}22 & \phantom{11}60 & $5.51\cdot 10^3 $ \\ +V & \phantom{1}90 -- 200 & \phantom{1}41 & \phantom{1}130 & $2.42\cdot 10^3 $ \\ +VI & 200 -- 400 & \phantom{1}60 & \phantom{1}300 & $0 $ \\ +VII & 400 -- 900 & \phantom{1}80 & \phantom{1}600 & $0 $ \\ +VIII & \phantom{1}900 -- 2000 & 110 & 1300 & $0 $ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:2} +\end{table} + +\begin{figure}[b] +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Modelled size distributions ({\it steps}) for natural cirrus ({\it +solid}) and contrails ({\it dashed}). Also shown are replicator measured size +distributions as indicted in Fig.~\ref{fig:4} for natural cirrus ({\it +solid}) and contrails ({\it dashed})} +\label{fig:6} +\end{figure} + +\subsubsection{Radiative properties of contrails and natural cirrus clouds.} +% +The radiative transfer model adopted to calculate vertical profiles of +upward- and downward-directed fluxes is based on the matrix operator +theory \citep{Pl73}. This RTM accounts for processes of multiple +scattering, absorption and thermal emission. The cloud optical +properties are described by $\phi$ (solar), $g$ (terrestrial), $\sigma$ +and $\omega$. Besides the cloud parameters, the RTM needs the +corresponding optical parameters for aerosol particles. Furthermore, the +vertical profiles of temperature, pressure and air density, as well as +the absorber masses of the relevant gases, characterize the atmospheric +state. These meteorological parameters are given for our model +atmospheres in Appendix~B. Table~\ref{tab:6} in Appendix~A shows the +spectral resolution within the solar spectral range as used in the RTM. + +In the solar region, the sharp forward peak of the cirrus phase function +is truncated by applying the delta-function approximation. In the +terrestrial range, a Henyey-Greenstein approximation of the phase +function is adopted which depends only on the asymmetry factor. The +transmission functions of the relevant gases valid in the spectral +subintervals are approximated by exponential sum fitting. + +Table~\ref{tab:7} in Appendix~A gives the values of $C$, $g$ and +$\omega$ for the cirrus and contrail cloud as calculated for hexagonally +shaped particles with geometrical optics. $C$ designates the extinction +cross-section and equals the extinction coefficient normalized to one +particle per cm$^{-3}$. Note that the $g$ values are shown in the table +but subsequently are not used. For the model calculations, the complete +phase function is used. Note that the spectral resolution is not +identical to that in the RTM (see Table~\ref{tab:6}), however, it accounts +for a proper representation of the radiative properties which in turn +mainly follow the spectral behaviour of the complex refractive index of +ice. Phase functions are calculated at wavelengths 0.550, 1.100, 1.400, +1.905, 2.600 and 3.077$\mu$m. These wavelengths are chosen as +representative with respect to the spectral behaviour of the refractive +index of ice. + +To obtain the analogous values for the RTM input spectral intervals +(Table~\ref{tab:6}), a proper mean value is calculated by +\begin{equation} +\overline{x_j} = \frac{\sum_{i} x_i E_i \Delta \lambda_{i,j}}{\sum_{i} E_i +\Delta \lambda_{i,j}}, +\label{eq:1} +\end{equation} +where $x$ represents the variables $\sigma$ and $\omega$, +$\overline{x_j}$ designates the mean value of the $j$th spectral +interval $\sum_{i} \Delta \lambda_{i,j}$ within the solar spectral +range. The variable $E_i$ is the solar constant at the wavelength $i$. + +The first column in Table~\ref{tab:8} in Appendix~A shows the spectral +resolution in the terrestrial region used by the RTM. In order to obtain +$\sigma$, $g$ and $\omega$ values in the terrestrial region, +Mie-calculations for corresponding spherical particles were carried out +within each spectral interval at its central wavelength given in +Table~\ref{tab:8}, where the conversion from hexagonal particles into +corresponding spheres is done by calculation of equivalent volume. It is +expected that such spheres give better $\omega$ values compared to +spheres of equal surface \citep{Ta89}. + +Downward- and upward-directed solar fluxes at cloud top and base result +from RTM calculations for the isolated cloud layer as radiative transfer +medium. In a next step, the cloud transmittance is derived by relating +the downward directed fluxes at cloud top and base, respectively. The +ratio of upward and downward flux at cloud top correspondingly gives the +cloud reflectance. Solar zenith angles are cosine weighted means over +the solar day for July and October in Munich. Results are shown in +Table~\ref{tab:3}. + +\begin{table} +\caption{Solar radiative properties of cirrus and contrails as derived from +RTM calculations (Jci: July, cirrus, Jco: July, contrails, Oci: October, +cirrus, Oco: October, contrails)} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}cccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +case & solar zenith angle & transmittance & reflectance \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +Jci & 58.71 $^{\circ}$ &0.932 & 0.057 \\ +Jco & 58.71 $^{\circ}$ &0.908 & 0.080 \\ +Oci & 69.78 $^{\circ}$ &0.891 & 0.095 \\ +Oco & 69.78 $^{\circ}$ &0.855 & 0.131 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:3} +\end{table} + +As expected, transmittances increase and reflectances decrease with +decreasing particle concentration. The extinction coefficient value is +found to be 0.130 and 0.198\,km$^{-1}$ for cirrus and contrails, +respectively, at a wavelength of 0.55\,$\mu$m. Values of the cloud +optical thickness at a wavelength of 0.55\,$\mu$m are 0.18 and 0.28 for +cirrus and contrails, respectively. + +To obtain emittance, transmittance and reflectance in the terrestrial +spectral range, RTM calculations were carried out for two different +vertical atmospheric segments: (1) the atmosphere between surface and +cloud top and (2) the cloud layer only. The first serves to obtain the +upward fluxes at cloud top $f_{top} \uparrow $ and cloud base $f_{base} +\uparrow $, the latter gives the fluxes emitted by the cloud layer +itself, designated as $fcl_{top} \uparrow $ and $fcl_{base} \downarrow +$. The upward-directed emittance is calculated according to $fcl_{top} +\uparrow $ / $\varsigma T_{top}^4$ , where $\varsigma$ denotes the +Stefan--Boltzmann constant and $T_{top}$ the temperature at cloud top. +The downward-directed emittance is calculated analogously. In the RCM +the mean of these two emittance values is used. The transmittance is +given by $(f_{top} \uparrow - fcl_{top} \uparrow )/f_{base} \uparrow$, +the reflectance by $( f_{base} \downarrow - fcl_{base} \downarrow +)/f_{base} \uparrow$. Table~\ref{tab:4} lists the results, Table~\ref{tab:5} +presents the derived values for cloud emittance, transmittance and +reflectance. + +\begin{table} +\caption{Radiative fluxes in the terrestrial spectral range; $f_{top} +\uparrow$: upward flux at cloud top, $f_{base} \uparrow$: upward flux at +cloud base, $f_{base} \downarrow$: downward flux at cloud base, +$fcl_{top} \uparrow$: upward flux at cloud top (cloud only), $fcl_{base} +\downarrow$: downward flux at cloud base (cloud only), other +designations as in Table~\ref{tab:3}} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}cccccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +case & $f_{top} \uparrow $ & $f_{base} \uparrow $ & $ f_{base} \downarrow $ +& $fcl_{top} \uparrow $ & $fcl_{base} \downarrow $ \\ +& Wm$^{-2}$ & Wm$^{-2}$ & Wm$^{-2}$ & Wm$^{-2}$ & Wm$^{-2}$ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +Jci & 245.1 & 286.7 & 75.5 & 57.0 & 59.9 \\ +Jco & 231.8 & 286.7 & 86.3 & 62.2 & 65.3 \\ +Oci & 238.5 & 272.3 & 54.4 & 43.4 & 45.5 \\ +Oco & 227.8 & 272.3 & 62.9 & 48.7 & 51.0 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:4} +\end{table} + +\begin{table}[b] +\caption{Derived ice cloud radiative properties in the terrestrial spectral +range} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}lccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +case & emittance & transmittance & reflectance \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +Jci & 0.386 & 0.656 & 0.054 \\ +Jco & 0.421 & 0.592 & 0.073 \\ +Oci & 0.320 & 0.716 & 0.033 \\ +Oco & 0.359 & 0.658 & 0.044 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:5} +\end{table} + +As expected, emittances and reflectances increase with increasing particle +concentration whereas transmittances decrease with increasing particle +concentrations. + +\subsection{Parameterization of advection} + +\subsubsection{Method.} +% +In our case study an atmospheric segment with vertical boundaries along +the region of southern Germany is modelled. For simplicity it is called +in the following an `atmospheric box'. In contrast to modelling on a +global scale, net fluxes of energy through the lateral boundaries of +this atmospheric box have to be taken into account. It is assumed that +the net energy flux which leaves the top of the box as radiation (in the +considered time period) equals the energy flux which is gained through +the lateral faces as advection. The profile of advected energy is set +proportional to the wind profile. The value of the energy flux leaving +the atmospheric box at the top is taken from ERBE (Earth Radiation +Budget Experiment) satellite data. This flux is $-59$ and 97\,Wm$^{-2}$ +in the months of July and October, respectively, the minus sign in the +July case representing an energy gain for the box. More details +concerning the satellite data are given in Appendix~B. Values for the +vertical profile of the wind speed are taken from radiosonde data, +'Munich' station, averaged for the years 1981--1985. + +Within the frame of this study, no feedback mechanisms concerning +advection are taken into consideration. + +\subsubsection{Results of regionalization.} +% +Figure~\ref{fig:7} shows RCM results for the reference case, i.e. the case +with climatological values of cirrus cloud cover in July. Two +temperature profiles are shown: one results from including advection as +already outlined, whereas the other results from neglecting it. For +comparison, the climatological July values as derived from radiosonde +data are shown. + +\begin{figure}[b] +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Modelled temperature profiles for July with ({\it solid}) and without +({\it dashed}) advection compared to radiosonde measurements ({\it triangles})} +\label{fig:7} +\end{figure} + +Calculated temperatures fit quite well throughout the whole troposphere. +A small inversion layer is modelled at the surface but not seen in the +climatology values. This indicates that the Bowen ratio might not be +representative for this case, however, in this study only temperature +differences are of interest. + +\begin{figure} +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{As in Fig.~\ref{fig:1}., but for October conditions} +\label{fig:8} +\end{figure} + +Figure~\ref{fig:8} shows corresponding temperature profiles for October +conditions. Noteworthy is the great influence of advection inducing a +temperature difference of approximately 25\,K throughout the +troposphere. It is important to note that the uncertainty of the +satellite data is in the order of 10\,Wm$^{-2}$ which corresponds to an +uncertainty in the temperature profile in the order of only 3\,K. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Section 4 % +%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\section{Results and discussion} +\label{sec:4} + +The impact of ice clouds induced by air traffic is estimated by +comparing the RCM results for an increased high cloud cover with those +for the reference cases in July and October. It is assumed that the ice +cloud cover increases at the expense of the uncovered area. + +The surface temperature results are shown in Fig.~\ref{fig:9}. An ice +cloud cover increase due to contrails by 10\% causes surface temperature +increases of 1.1 and 0.8\,K\, in July and October, respectively. +Assuming that the increased cloud cover is due to clouds which have +natural cirrus properties, these values are 1.2 and 0.9\,K, +respectively. Thus, for both months the increase in high cloud cover due +to natural cirrus warms the surface more than the increase due to +contrails. Obviously, the primarily larger shortwave albedo of the +contrails due to more smaller particles leads to less warming than in +the case of natural cirrus, even if the emittance of contrails is larger +than that of natural cirrus. Figure~\ref{fig:9} shows a linear relation +between cloud cover and surface temperature, because the RCM weights +flux linearly with cloud cover. Part of the contrails certainly will +occur over mid- and low-level clouds. Since the RCM does not consider +overlapping effects of several cloud layers, our values for surface +warming represent an upper limit. + +\begin{figure} +\unitlength0.9cm +\begin{picture}(8.575,7) +\framebox(8.575,7){} +\end{picture} +\caption{Increase in surface temperature $\Delta T_{surf} $ in +dependence on additional ice cloud cover $\eta $ due to contrails and +cirrus in the case of mean July and October conditions over southern +Germany. {\it Solid}: July, cirrus; {\it dotted}: July, contrails; {\it +dashed}: October, cirrus; {\it dash-dotted}: October, contrails} +\label{fig:9} +\end{figure} + +As a further result the radiative forcing at the top of the atmosphere +with a fixed temperature and humidity profile is obtained. In the July +case the upward terrestrial flux at the top af the atmosphere is reduced +by 3.3\,Wm\,$^{-2}$ in the case of a 10\% increase in cirrus cloud +cover. The corresponding decrease in the solar flux is 0.5\,Wm\,$^{-2}$. +In the October case, the terrestrial flux is reduced by +2.6\,Wm\,$^{-2}$, and the solar flux by 0.1\,Wm\,$^{-2}$. The values in +the contrail cases are slightly lower. + +The current cloud cover which is due to contrails and thereby obviously +due to air traffic is estimated to be in the order of 0.5\% over Europe +\citep{Ba94}. This increase in cloud cover might be regarded as the +minimum amount of air traffic induced cloud cover. Therefore it is +expected that the increases in surface temperature are approximately +0.06 and 0.05\,K in July and October, respectively. + +With regard to the uncertainty in our results, we varied the advection +term by 10\,Wm$^{-2}$ (that corresponds to an uncertainty of +10\,Wm$^{-2}$ in the satellite radiation measurement), the resulting +uncertainty in the surface temperature is about 0.02\,K (change from +96.75 to 106.75\,Wm$^{-2}$ in the satellite measured net radiative flux +for the October case). Assuming a doubling of the latent heat flux at +surface (which is much more than a realistic assumption), the resulting +uncertainty in the surface temperature is about 0.01\,K (in the October +case). These values show that these uncertainties have no important +influence on the results. + +In comparison to a corresponding global sensitivity study for the +climatic effect of an additional contrail cloudiness in the North +Atlantic region \citep{Po96}, our value for the increase in the surface +temperature in July is larger (1.2\,K compared to 1\,K). However, in +this GCM calculation, the ocean temperature was fixed, and so the true +response of additional cloudiness is slightly underestimated. + +The question of the climatic importance is relative: compared to an +increase in the temperature of 1\,K between the Middle Ages and today, +our 0.05\,K value is surely not significant. On the other hand, climate +change is a composite of multiple effects and one should keep air +traffic in mind as being one of these. Furthermore, our results +represent equilibrium conditions, and the question of possible effects +in the non-equilibrium state remains open, e.g. influences in the +day-to-night differences in temperature. + +The results give an idea of how sensitive the regional temperature +profile reacts on changes in the ice cloud layer which are due to +changes in cloud cover, radiative properties of the ice clouds and solar +zenith angle. However, we must keep in mind that our results are based +on the assumption that the radiation balance on top of the atmosphere is +fixed to the value that belongs to the undisturbed case and further that +large-scale advection of energy into the area does not change. In view +of the small temperature changes induced by the changes in cirrus cloud +cover, these assumptions are expected to be fulfilled to a first order, +and our results represent an upper limit of the regional effects of an +additional cloudiness caused by air traffic. This is also supported by +the results from a three-dimensional GCM which include feedback +mechanisms and show the same order of magnitude \citep{Po96}. + +\begin{acknowledgement} +For friendly help concerning the albedo values and discussions on +aerosol distributions we thank W. Thomas. Concerning ERBE data our +thanks are given to M. Rieland and K. Standfuss (Meteorologisches +Institut der Universitaet Hamburg). Last but not least we are very +grateful to K.N. Liou and S.C. Ou for having made available to us a +version of their radiative convective model. This work was supported by +the Bavarian regional climate research programme (BayFORKLIM), which was +funded by the 'Bayerisches Ministerium fuer Landesentwicklung und +Umweltfragen'. Their financial support is greatly acknowledged. Topical +Editor L. Eymard thanks P. Hignett and S. Kinne for their help in +evaluating this paper. +\end{acknowledgement} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Correct space for this article! %% +\vspace{-5pt} %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\begin{table}[b] +\caption[]{Spectral resolution in the solar spectral range} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{10pt}}cc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +interval number & wavelength range \\ +& $\mu$m \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +1 & 0.20 -- 0.30 \\ +2 & 0.30 -- 0.35 \\ +3 & 0.35 -- 0.40 \\ +4 & 0.40 -- 0.45 \\ +5 & 0.45 -- 0.50 \\ +6 & 0.50 -- 0.55 \\ +7 & 0.55 -- 0.60 \\ +8 & 0.60 -- 0.80 \\ +9 & 0.80 -- 0.90 \\ +10 & 0.90 -- 1.00 \\ +11 & 1.00 -- 1.20 \\ +12 & 1.20 -- 1.60 \\ +13 & 1.60 -- 2.20 \\ +14 & 2.20 -- 3.00 \\ +15 & 3.00 -- 3.40 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:6} +\end{table} + +\begin{appendix} + +\section*{Appendix A} +\label{sec:a} + +\subsection*{Tables indicating RTM calculations} + +These tables, referred to in the text, are put in an Appendix for +reasons of clarity and readability. + +\begin{table} +\caption[]{Optical parameters of cirrus and contrail used in the solar +region. Symbols without a hat denote cirrus parameters, symbols with a +hat denote contrail parameters} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{-.8pt}}ccccccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +$\lambda$& $C$ & $\hat{C}$ & $g$ & $\hat{g}$ & $\omega $ & $\hat{\omega}$ \\ +$\mu$m & m$^{-1}cm^3$ & m$^{-1}cm^3$ & & & & \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +0.423 & 2.25$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.752 & 0.746 & 1.000 & 1.000 \\ +0.550 & 2.25$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.757 & 0.751 & 1.000 & 1.000 \\ +0.635 & 2.25$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.760 & 0.753 & 1.000 & 1.000 \\ +0.780 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.762 & 0.755 & 1.000 & 1.000 \\ +0.830 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.762 & 0.754 & 1.000 & 1.000 \\ +0.015 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.764 & 0.756 & 0.999 & 1.000 \\ +1.100 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.766 & 0.759 & 0.999 & 1.000 \\ +1.200 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 1.99$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.768 & 0.761 & 0.998 & 0.999 \\ +1.400 & 2.26$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.00$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.771 & 0.764 & 0.995 & 0.997 \\ +1.449 & 2.29$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.02$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.789 & 0.778 & 0.943 & 0.959 \\ +1.504 & 2.32$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.03$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.804 & 0.792 & 0.900 & 0.924 \\ +1.615 & 2.30$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.02$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.791 & 0.779 & 0.939 & 0.956 \\ +1.850 & 2.27$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.00$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.785 & 0.777 & 0.985 & 0.990 \\ +1.905 & 2.31$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.03$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.803 & 0.793 & 0.930 & 0.950 \\ +2.000 & 2.37$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.07$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.831 & 0.819 & 0.844 & 0.874 \\ +2.190 & 2.30$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.02$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.807 & 0.798 & 0.959 & 0.972 \\ +2.600 & 2.35$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.06$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.867 & 0.859 & 0.910 & 0.933 \\ +3.077 & 2.59$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.28$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.941 & 0.938 & 0.534 & 0.534 \\ +3.413 & 2.52$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 2.21$\cdot 10^{-4}$ & 0.878 & 0.869 & 0.606 & 0.614 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:7} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption[]{Optical parameters of cirrus and contrail cloud models in the +terrestrial region. Symbols without a hat denote cirrus parameters, +symbols with a hat denote contrail parameters} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}ccccccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +$\lambda$& $\sigma$ & $\hat{\sigma}$ & $g$ & $\hat{g}$ & $\omega $ & $\hat{\omega}$ \\ +$\mu$m & km$^{-1}$ & km$^{-1}$ &-&-&-&-\\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +\phantom{1}4.08 &0.1623 &0.2553 &0.830 &0.820 &0.748 &0.769 \\ +\phantom{1}4.26 &0.1728 &0.2715 &0.852 &0.844 &0.727 &0.746 \\ +\phantom{1}4.40 &0.1696 &0.2669 &0.875 &0.868 &0.693 &0.709 \\ +\phantom{1}4.49 &0.1783 &0.2813 &0.880 &0.874 &0.676 &0.690 \\ +\phantom{1}4.65 &0.1732 &0.2722 &0.874 &0.867 &0.701 &0.718 \\ +\phantom{1}4.88 &0.1938 &0.3082 &0.863 &0.857 &0.783 &0.804 \\ +\phantom{1}5.13 &0.1895 &0.3010 &0.871 &0.866 &0.791 &0.813 \\ +\phantom{1}5.41 &0.1951 &0.3091 &0.886 &0.881 &0.764 &0.785 \\ +\phantom{1}5.71 &0.1748 &0.2768 &0.909 &0.905 &0.684 &0.698 \\ +\phantom{1}6.06 &0.1727 &0.2742 &0.918 &0.914 &0.608 &0.615 \\ +\phantom{1}6.45 &0.1742 &0.2763 &0.904 &0.899 &0.638 &0.648 \\ +\phantom{1}6.90 &0.1639 &0.2574 &0.904 &0.898 &0.634 &0.645 \\ +\phantom{1}7.41 &0.1670 &0.2618 &0.896 &0.889 &0.649 &0.661 \\ +\phantom{1}8.00 &0.1628 &0.2557 &0.891 &0.884 &0.669 &0.683 \\ +\phantom{1}8.70 &0.1485 &0.2300 &0.897 &0.890 &0.671 &0.688 \\ +\phantom{1}9.30 &0.1429 &0.2197 &0.902 &0.894 &0.639 &0.654 \\ +\phantom{1}9.76 &0.1266 &0.2927 &0.913 &0.905 &0.612 &0.625 \\ +10.53 &0.1048 &0.2541 &0.947 &0.938 &0.426 &0.412 \\ +11.76 &0.1399 &0.2138 &0.883 &0.871 &0.441 &0.429 \\ +12.90 &0.1597 &0.2496 &0.846 &0.835 &0.468 &0.460 \\ +13.79 &0.1570 &0.2429 &0.841 &0.829 &0.500 &0.495 \\ +14.81 &0.1845 &0.2889 &0.804 &0.790 &0.547 &0.548 \\ +16.00 &0.1686 &0.2627 &0.798 &0.783 &0.580 &0.586 \\ +18.18 &0.1449 &0.2188 &0.768 &0.747 &0.629 &0.644 \\ +22.22 &0.1193 &0.1747 &0.752 &0.729 &0.732 &0.763 \\ +28.57 &0.0902 &0.1232 &0.793 &0.763 &0.605 &0.631 \\ +40.00 &0.0829 &0.1148 &0.847 &0.811 &0.350 &0.314 \\ +66.67 &0.1107 &0.1511 &0.684 &0.621 &0.406 &0.380 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:8} +\end{table} + +\section*{Appendix B} +\label{sec:b} + +\subsection*{Input parameters for the radiative convective model and the +matrix operator model} + +This appendix summarizes the input parameters describing atmospheric +conditions for the RCM as well as for the matrix operator model in the +cases of both months studied, July and October. + +Tables~\ref{tab:9} and~\ref{tab:10} list the input parameters concerning +the atmospheric conditions in the case of July and October, respectively +from radiosonde data. Temperatures are used as starting point for the +RCM calculations and data for modelling the optical properties of the +cirrus cloud layer. The data are taken from radiosonde measurements +averaged over the years 1981 to 1985, DWD (Deutscher Wetterdienst) +station Munich, except the humidity values in 100 and 150\,hPa, which +are averages from 1987 to 1989 due to lack of corresponding values in +the mentioned time-period. + +\begin{table}[b] +\caption[]{Radiosonde values over southern Germany in the month of July, +averages from 1981 to 1985} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}ccccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +height & pressure & temperature & air density & +humidity \\ km & hPa & K & g\,cm$^{-3}$ & \% \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +31.85 & \phantom{1}10 & 233.6 & 14.91 & \\ +27.13 & \phantom{1}20 & 227.4 & 30.64 & \\ +24.43 & \phantom{1}30 & 223.9 & 46.68 & \\ +21.09 & \phantom{1}50 & 220.4 & 79.03 & \\ +18.91 & \phantom{1}70 & 218.5 & 111.6 & \\ +16.62 & 100 & 218.1 & 159.7 & 19.5 \\ +14.01 & 150 & 220.0 & 237.5 & 20.6 \\ +12.15 & 200 & 220.1 & 316.5 & 40.3 \\ +10.70 & 250 & 224.2 & 388.4 & 44.5 \\ +\phantom{1}9.47 & 300 & 232.5 & 449.5 & 44.4 \\ +\phantom{1}7.44 & 400 & 248.1 & 561.5 & 42.9 \\ +\phantom{1}5.78 & 500 & 259.7 & 670.2 & 44.2 \\ +\phantom{1}3.13 & 700 & 275.5 & 883.1 & 58.5 \\ +\phantom{1}1.54 & 850 & 285.2 & 1033.8 & 67.6\\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:9} +\end{table} + +\begin{table}[b] +\caption[]{Radiosonde values over southern Germany in the month of +October, averages from 1981 to 1985} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}ccccc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +height & pressure & temperature & air density & humidity \\ +km & hPa & K & g\,cm$^{-3}$ & \% \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +31.01 & \phantom{1}10 & 222.5 & 15.66 & \\ +26.50 & \phantom{1}20 & 218.2 & 31.93 & \\ +23.91 & \phantom{1}30 & 216.0 & 48.38 & \\ +20.67 & \phantom{1}50 & 214.3 & 81.28 & \\ +18.55 & \phantom{1}70 & 213.9 & 114.0 & \\ +16.30 & 100 & 213.4 & 163.2 & 18.9 \\ +13.75 & 150 & 213.8 & 244.4 & 20.8 \\ +11.94 & 200 & 215.2 & 323.8 & 33.2 \\ +10.52 & 250 & 220.8 & 394.4 & 35.2 \\ +\phantom{1}9.31 & 300 & 228.7 & 457.0 & 37.6 \\ +\phantom{1}7.32 & 400 & 243.9 & 571.3 & 34.1 \\ +\phantom{1}5.68 & 500 & 255.7 & 681.2 & 35.7 \\ +\phantom{1}3.08 & 700 & 271.2 & 899.2 & 46.3 \\ +\phantom{1}1.51 & 850 & 279.5 & 1059. & 56.1 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:10} +\end{table} + +Humidity values above 100\,hPa as well as all other values above 10\,hPa +are taken from McClatchey et al. (1972), mid-latitude summer atmosphere, +1962 and US standard atmosphere for July and October, respectively. +Surface values are 1981 to 1985 averages from the `Europaeischer +Wetterbericht' \citep{DWD}, and ozone data are from DWD station +Hohenpeissenberg (also 1981 to 1985). + +\subsection*{Cloud cover and liquid water path} + +Cloud cover values are taken from \citet{Wa88}. Values are based on +ground observation averages between 1971 and 1981. Spatial resolution of +these data is $5^{\circ} \times 5^{\circ}$, temporal resolution is 3 +months. The following classification is used: Cu, Cb, St, Ns, As, Ac, +and Ci. To get cloud cover values for the three cloud layers in the RCM, +Cu, Cb, St, Ns are chosen to give the low cloud cover, Cb, Ns, As, Ac to +give the mid-level cloud cover and Ci to give the high cloud cover, +following a procedure used by Liou in the original version of the RCM +\citep{Li85}. This leads to cloud cover values 0.31, 0.21, 0.07 and 0.41 +for low, middle, high clouds and clear sky, respectively in the month of +July. The corresponding values for October are 0.56, 0.34, 0.16 and +0.59, respectively. + +The RCM is unable to calculate interactions between clouds. Therefore, +the radiative flux computations are performed for different atmospheres +containing one cloud layer each for low, middle and high clouds and one +clear atmosphere are calculated separately and radiation fluxes are +weighted afterwards with the corresponding cloud-cover values. For this +reason, the cloud-cover values given are compacted in the RCM. This is +done by multiplication with a constant factor (less than 1) in the way +that the sum of the cloud cover and the clear sky fraction add up to 1. +Note, however, that the interaction between a single cloud layer and the +surface is taken into consideration. + +The liquid water path value of low clouds is taken from \citet{Li83} as +60.411\,g\,m$^{-2}$, that for mid-level clouds to 54.06\,g\,m$^{-2}$ in +the present study. The ice water path for cirrus cloud is assumed to be +2.908\,g\,m$^{-2}$ according to measurements of \citet{He84}. + +\subsection*{Surface albedo} + +The surface solar albedo values are taken from \citet{Ko92}. These +values are based on satellite measurements. In the case of October, +values from 10:00, 13:00 and 16:00 local time are available, +corresponding to sun elevations of 26.87$^{\circ}$, 31.06$^{\circ}$ and +12.29$^{\circ}$, respectively. Interpolation to 20.22$^{\circ}$ +elevation angle which is used in the RCM leads to an albedo of 11.3\%. +This value is used for the October calculations. + +In the case of July, only the 13:00 local time value was available. This +value is 15.6\%. Due to the fact that the albedo has a minimum value at +the time of the highest sun elevation angles, an albedo value slightly +higher than this value was chosen as representative in the July +calculations. The value was estimated to be 17\% (W. Thomas, personal +communication). + +\subsection*{Aerosol data} + +Aerosol data are chosen to represent continental conditions for both +months studied, July and October (M. Hess and P. Koepke, personal +communication). Table~\ref{tab:11} shows the assumed aerosol components +and particle numbers. These values are valid for sea level. The dependence +on altitude is modeled after +\begin{equation} +n(h) = n(0)exp(-h/Z), +\label{eq:2} +\end{equation} +where $n$ denotes the particle number, $h$ the altitude and $Z$ a reference +altitude which is 8\,km. For more details, including refractive indices, +see \citet{WM83}. + +\begin{table} +\caption[]{Aerosol conditions used for calculations} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{\fill}}llll@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +height & aerosol type & number & mode radius \\ +km & & cm$^{-3}$ & $\mu$m \\ +\noalign{\smallskip}\hline\noalign{\smallskip} +- 2 & water soluble (70\%)& 7000 & 0.0285 \\ +& insoluble & 0.4 & 0.471 \\ +& soot & 8300 & 0.0118 \\ +2-12 & water soluble (50\%)& 438 & 0.0262 \\ +& insoluble & 1.24$\cdot 10^{-3}$ & 0.471 \\ +& soot & 292 & 0.0118 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:11} +\end{table} + +\subsection*{Satellite data used for parameterization of advection} + +Satellite data are taken from ERBE (Earth Radiation Budget Experiment) +via the `Meteorologisches Institut der Universitaet Hamburg'. Spatial +resolution of these data is $2.5^{\circ} \times 2.5^{\circ}$. The data +are taken from 47.5$^{\circ}$ to 50.0$^{\circ}$N and 10.0$^{\circ}$ to +12.5$^{\circ}$E and cover quite accurately the area of Bavaria, southern +Germany. In the case of July, a 5-year average of monthly averaged net +fluxes (top of atmosphere) is used (1985--1989). Values are 68.75, +55.96, 54.63, 61.94 and 51.80\,Wm$^{-2}$ for the 5 months, respectively. +The mean value used is 58.62\,Wm$^{-2}$. For October, corresponding data +from 2 years 1985 and 1986 are used. Values are $-99.00$\,Wm and +$-94.50$\,Wm$^{-2}$, respectively, and the mean value +$-96.75$\,Wm$^{-2}$ is used. + +\subsection*{Bowen ratio data} + +The relation ship between surface fluxes of sensible and latent heat +strongly dominates the temperature profile near surface. Values were +taken from \citet{Be69}. These values were measured in 1964 on the area +of a meteorological research station of the University of Munich, +Germany, located in the surroundings of the city. It is not clear how +representative they are these values are for whole southern Germany and +how representative they are for a monthly mean averaged over many years. +However, due to lack of better data these values, given in Table~\ref{tab:12} +are used in the calculations. + +\begin{table}[t] +\caption[]{Bowen ratios for July and October, southern Germany used in +the calculations} +\begin{tabular*}{84.22mm}{@{\hspace{0pt}\extracolsep{10pt}}cc@{\hspace{0pt}}} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +month & sensible heat / latent heat \\ +& $\rm Wm\it^{-2} /\rm Wm\it^{-2} $ \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\noalign{\smallskip} +July & 24 / 130 \\ +October & 9 / 31 \\ +\noalign{\smallskip} +\hline +\end{tabular*} +\label{tab:12} +\end{table} + +\end{appendix} + +\begin{thebibliography}{} + +\bibitem[Arnott \etal(1994)]{Ar94} {\bf Arnott, W.P., Y.Y. Dong, J. +Hallett, and M.R. Poellot}, Role of small ice crystals in radiative +properties of cirrus: a case-study, FIRE II, November 22, 1991, {\it J. +Geophys. Res.}, {\bf 99}, 1371--1381, 1994. + +\bibitem[Bakan \etal(1994)]{Ba94} {\bf Bakan, S., M. Betancor, V. +Gayler, and H. Grassl}, Contrail frequency over Europe from +NOAA-satellite images, {\it Ann. Geophysicae}, {\bf 12}, 962--968, 1994. + +\bibitem[Berz(1969)]{Be69} {\bf Berz, G.}, {\it Energiehaushalt der +Bodenoberfl\"ache}, {\it Meteorologisches Institut der Universit\"at +M\"unchen}, 1969. + +\bibitem[Deepak and Gerber(1983)]{WM83} {\bf Deepak, A., and H.E. Gerber +(eds.)}, Report of the expert meeting on aerosols and their climatic +effects, {\bf WCP-55}, 1983 + +\bibitem[Deutscher Wetterdienst(1981)]{DWD} {\bf Europaeischer +Wetterbericht}, DWD, Amtsblatt des Deutschen Wetterdienstes, D6168, ISSN +0341-2970, 1981--1985. + +\bibitem[Gayet \etal(1996)]{Ga96} {\bf Gayet, J.-F., G. Febvre, G. +Brogniez, H. Chepfer, W. Renger, and P. Wendling}, Microphysical and +optical properties of cirrus and contrails: cloud field study on 13 +October 1989, {\it J. Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf 53}, 126--138, 1996. + +\bibitem[Hess and Wiegner(1994)]{He94} {\bf Hess, M., and M. Wiegner}, +COP: Data library of optical properties of hexagonal ice crystals, {\it +Appl. Opt.}, {\bf 33}, 7740--7746, 1994. + +\bibitem[Heymsfield and Platt(1984)]{He84} {\bf Heymsfield, A.J., and +C.M.R. Platt}, A parameterization of the particle size spectrum of ice +clouds in terms of the ambient temperature and the ice water content, +{\it J. Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf 41}, 846--855, 1984. + +\bibitem[Iaquinta \etal(1995)]{Ia95} {\bf Iaquinta, J., H. Isaka, and P. +Personne}, Scattering phase function of bullet rosette ice crystals, +{\it J. Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf 52}, 1401--1413, 1995. + +\bibitem[Koepke(1992)]{Ko92} {\bf Koepke, P., R. Meerkoetter, W. Thomas, +and B. Vogel}, Albedo in Mitteleuropa aus METEOSAT-Minimumcounts, {\it +Meteorologisches Institut der Universit\"at M\"unchen, Forschungsbericht +`MIM-FB92-S4'}, 1992. + +\bibitem[Liou(1992)]{Li92} {\bf Liou, K.N.}, {\it Radiation and cloud +processes in the atmosphere}, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1992. + +\bibitem[Liou and Ou(1983)]{Li83} {\bf Liou, K.N., and S.C. Ou}, Theory +of equilibrium temperatures in radiative-turbulent atmospheres, {\it J. +Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf 40}, 214--229, 1983. + +\bibitem[Liou \etal(1985)]{Li85} {\bf Liou, K.N., S.C. Ou, and P.J. Lu}, +Interactive cloud formation and climatic temperature perturbations, {\it +J. Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf 42}, 1969--1981, 1985. + +\bibitem[Liou \etal(1990)]{Li90} {\bf Liou, K.N., S.C. Ou, and G. +Koenig}, An investigation on the climatic effect of contrail cirrus, in: +{\it Air traffic and the environment -- background, tendencies and +potential global atmospheric effects, Ed. U. Schumann, Proc. DLR Int. +Coll., Bonn, Germany}, Springer, Berlin Heidelberg New York 1990. + +\bibitem[McClatchey \etal(1972)]{MC72} {\bf McClatchey, R.A., R.W. Fenn, +J.E.A. Selby, F.E. Volz, and J.S. Garing}, Optical properties of the +atmosphere (third edition), {\it Air Force Systems Command, United +States Air Force, AFCRL-72-0497}, 1972. + +\bibitem[Macke(1993)]{Ma93} {\bf Macke, A.}, Scattering of light by +polyhedral ice crystals, {\it Appl. Opt.}, {\bf 32}, 2780--2788, 1993. + +\bibitem[Plass \etal(1973)]{Pl73} {\bf Plass, G.N., G.W. Kattawar, and +F.E. Catchings}, Matrix operator theory of radiative transfer. 1: +Rayleigh scattering, {\it Appl. Opt.}, {\bf 12}, 314--329, 1973. + +\bibitem[Ponater \etal(1996)]{Po96} {\bf Ponater, M., S. Brinkop, R. +Sausen, and U. Schumann}, Simulating the global atmospheric response to +aircraft water vapour emissions and contrails: a first approach using a +GCM, {\it Ann. Geophysicae}, {\bf 14}, 941--960, 1996. + +\bibitem[Schumann(1994)]{Schu94} {\bf Schumann, U.}, On the effect of +emissions from aircraft engines on the state of the atmosphere, {\it +Ann. Geophysicae}, {\bf 12}, 365--384,\break 1994. + +\bibitem[Stackhouse and Stephens(1991)]{St91} {\bf Stackhouse, P.W., and +G.L. Stephens}, A theoretical and observational study of the radiative +properties of cirrus: results from FIRE 1986, {\it J. Atmos. Sci.}, {\bf +48}, 2044--2059, 1991. + +\bibitem[Strauss(1996)]{St96} {\bf Strauss, B.}, On the scattering +behaviour of bullet-rosette and bullet-shaped ice crystals, {\it Ann. +Geophysicae}, {\bf 14}, 566--573, 1996. + +\bibitem[Stroem(1993)]{St93} {\bf Stroem, J.}, Numerical and airborne +experimental studies of aerosol and cloud properties in the troposphere, +{\it Dissertation, Dep.\break Meteorology, Stockholm University, ISBN +91-7153-168-8},\break 1993. + +\bibitem[Takano and Liou(1989)]{Ta89} {\bf Takano, Y.,and K.-N. Liou}, +Solar radiative transfer in cirrus clouds. Part I: single--scattering +and optical properties of hexagonal ice crystals, {\it J. Atmos. Sci.}, +{\bf 46}, 3--19, 1989. + +\bibitem[Warren(1984)]{Wa84} {\bf Warren, S.G.}, Optical constants of +ice from the ultraviolet to the microwave, {\it Appl. Opt.}, {\bf 23}, +1206--1223, 1984. + +\bibitem[Warren \etal(1988)]{Wa88} {\bf Warren, S.G., C.J. Hahn, J. +London, R.M. Chervin, and R.L. Jenne}, Global distribution of total +cloud cover and cloud type amounts over land, {\it NCAR, Technical +Notes}, 1988. + +\bibitem[Wielicki \etal(1990)]{Wi90} {\bf Wielicki, B.A., J.T. Suttles, +A.J. Heymsfield, R.M. Welch, J.D. Spinhirne, M.C. Wu, D.O'C. Starr, L. +Parker, and R.F. Arduini}, The 27--28 October 1986 FIRE IFO cirrus +study: comparison of radiative transfer theory with observations by +satellite and aircraft, {\it Mon. Wea. Rev.}, {\bf 118}, 2356--2376, +1990. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33bdffdaca --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/springer/svjour/agp/natbib.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,3221 @@ +% \iffalse THIS IS A META-COMMENT +%<*dtx> +\ProvidesFile +%======================================================================== + {NATBIB.DTX} +%======================================================================== +% +% This is a LaTeX package to modify \cite and \thebibliography for author-year +% systems of bibliographic citation; will also work with +% numerical systems, allowing simplified style changes for them too. +% Installation: +% LaTeX this file: creates docstrip installation file natbib.ins +% AND the (LaTeX2e) documentation +% (La)TeX natbib.ins: creates package file natbib.sty +% and optionally the LaTeX 2.09 style natbib209.sty +% and doc driver natbib.drv +% (natbib.ins may be edited as needed) +% Docstrip options available: +% package - to produce a (LaTeX2e) package .sty file +% driver - to produce a driver file to print the documentation +% 209 - (with package) for style file that runs under LaTeX 2.09 +% subpack - (with package) for coding included in other packages +% all - (with package) to include all author-year systems +% else individually with: +% apalike, newapa, chicago, harvard, authordate, astron +% agu - (with package,subpack) for inclusion in aguplus package +% egs- (with package,subpack) for inclusion in egs package +% nopreonly - allows \citestyle and \bibpunct to be used anywhere +%-------------------------------------------------------------------------- +%<*!subpack> +%\def\ProvidesPackage#1#2] +% {\typeout{Style option `#1'#2]}} +% +% *** Identify the package file:- +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] +%\ProvidesPackage{natbib} +% +% +% *** Provide command to dislay module version +%\def\ModuleVersion#1[#2]{} +% \ModuleVersion{natbib} +% +% *** Identify the driver file:- +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +%\ProvidesFile{natbib.drv} +% +% *** The DATE, VERSION, and other INFO +%\fi +%\ProvidesFile{natbib} + [1997/02/05 6.5 (PWD)] +%\iffalse +%<*package> +%<*!subpack> +%%------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% NOTICE: +%% This file may be used for non-profit purposes. +%% It may not be distributed in exchange for money, +%% other than distribution costs. +%% +%% The author provides it `as is' and does not guarantee it in any way. +%% +% +% +%% Natbib coding copyright (C) 1994--1997 Patrick W. Daly +%<*package> +%<*!subpack> +%% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie +%% Postfach 20 +%% D-37189 Katlenburg-Lindau +%% Germany +%% +%% E-mail: +%% Internet-- daly@linmpi.dnet.gwdg.de +%%----------------------------------------------------------- +% +% +% END META-COMMENT \fi +% \changes{4.0}{1993 Aug 19}{First documented release} +% \changes{4.1}{1993 Oct 4}{Simplification of \cs{@citeapalk}} +% \changes{4.1a}{1993 Oct 14}{Add \texttt{rev} option for reversed comments +% in \cs{cite}} +% \changes{4.1b}{1993 Oct 18}{Add \cs{bibfont} to list definition =\cs{relax}} +% \changes{4.2}{1993 Oct 22}{Add coding for AGU, NLINPROC} +% \changes{4.2}{1993 Nov 20}{Add more coding for AGU} +% \changes{4.3a}{1994 Feb 24}{First additions for \LaTeXe} +% \changes{5.0}{1994 May 18}{Revised for \LaTeXe{} and 2.09} +% \changes{5.0}{1994 May 18}{Remove obsolete JGR, GRL coding} +% \changes{5.0}{1994 May 18}{Add \cs{citeauthor}, \cs{citeyear}} +% \changes{5.0}{1994 May 18}{Two optional texts for \cs{cite} so \texttt{rev} +% option obsolete} +% \changes{5.0}{1994 May 18}{\LaTeXe\ options to select punctuation} +% \changes{5.1}{1994 Jun 22}{Conform to first official release of \LaTeXe} +% \changes{5.1}{1994 Jun 22}{Separate \LaTeX\ and 2.09 files} +% \changes{5.1}{1994 Jun 22}{Put doc driver first} +% \changes{5.2}{1994 Aug 25}{Fix up 2.09 style to run in compatibility mode} +% \changes{5.2}{1994 Aug 25}{\cs{citeauthor}, \cs{citeyear} make BibTeX +% entry in aux file} +% \changes{5.2}{1994 Aug 25}{\cs{@citex} defined as in \LaTeXe} +% \changes{5.2}{1994 Aug 25}{Local config file \texttt{natbib.cfg} read in} +% \changes{5.3}{1994 Sep 13}{Add \cs{citefullauthor}, options \texttt{angle}, +% \texttt{curly}} +% \changes{5.3}{1994 Sep 19}{Add star version of \cs{cite} for full authors} +% \changes{5.3}{1994 Sep 26}{Fix accents in citations with proper definition +% of \cs{protect}} +% \changes{5.4}{1994 Nov 24}{Add space in \cs{@citex} for text cites} +% \changes{5.4}{1994 Nov 24}{Replace \cs{if@tempswa} by \cs{ifNAT@swa}} +% \changes{5.4}{1994 Nov 24}{Add superscript citation type to \cs{bibpunct}} +% \changes{5.4}{1994 Nov 24}{Add \cs{@citesuper}, fix up bugs in superscripts} +% \changes{5.4}{1994 Nov 24}{Define \cs{@citexnum} as in \LaTeXe} +% \changes{5.4}{1995 Feb 03}{Add \cs{citestyle} same as \cs{bibstyle}} +% \changes{5.4}{1995 Feb 08}{For repeated years and authors, print just letter} +% \changes{5.5}{1995 Mar 13}{Add \cs{bibhang} and command space in +% \cs{@cite}} +% \changes{5.5}{1995 Mar 16}{Add \cs{citealt} for citation with no +% parentheses} +% \changes{5.5}{1995 Mar 24}{Reorganize internal commands, using \cs{NAT@} +% prefixes} +% \changes{5.5}{1995 Mar 24}{Punctuation selection commands \cs{bibpunct}, +% \cs{citestyle} are now preamble only, whereas previously they had to +% come after the preamble} +% \changes{5.5}{1995 May 14}{Change names of punctuation commands to +% \cs{NAT@...}} +% \changes{6.0}{1995 Sep 4}{Allow numerical styles with author-year +% \texttt{bst} files} +% \changes{6.0}{1995 Sep 21}{Add automatic indexing of citations} +% \changes{6.0}{1995 Sep 29}{Accommodate \texttt{index} package} +% \changes{6.1}{1995 Nov 22}{Fixed for \LaTeXe\ \texttt{1995/12/01}} +% \changes{6.1}{1995 Dec 4}{Make more robust against changes to internals} +% \changes{6.1a}{1995 Dec 19}{Fix test for changed citations} +% \changes{6.2}{1996 Jan 10}{Replace all \cs{uppercase}} +% \changes{6.2}{1996 Jan 11}{Add \cs{citet}} +% \changes{6.2}{1996 Feb 2}{Fix superscript size} +% \changes{6.2}{1996 Mar 05}{Add length \cs{bibsep} for linespacing between +% references} +% \changes{6.2}{1996 Apr 15}{Fix clash with \texttt{amsart} and +% \texttt{amsbook}} +% \changes{6.3}{1996 Jun 10}{Allow \texttt{showkeys} to be loaded first} +% \changes{6.3}{1996 Jun 17}{Fix punctuation for \texttt{plainnat}} +% \changes{6.3}{1996 Jun 17}{Suppress extra labels with numericals} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Jun 18}{Provide \cs{bibname} and \cs{refname}} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Jun 27}{Change \texttt{nlinproc} option to \texttt{egs}} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Sep 1}{Make compatible with \texttt{chapterbib.sty}} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Sep 12}{Fix spacing for superscripts} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Sep 12}{Extra letter printed with \cs{citeyear}} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Sep 13}{Add compression and sorting of numerical citations} +% \changes{6.4}{1996 Oct 2}{Make compatible with \texttt{hyperref.sty}} +% \changes{6.5}{1996 Dec 11}{KOMA script compatibility} +% \changes{6.5}{1997 Jan 10}{For EGS, no blank line between references} +% \changes{6.5}{1997 Jan 30}{Recode notes so they work with \cs{citet} and +% \cs{citep}; change documentation to stress these commands over \cs{cite}} +% \changes{6.5}{1997 Feb 5}{Fix KOMA script properly} +% +% \CheckSum{1706} +% \CharacterTable +% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +% +% \iffalse +%<*install> +%^^A ============================================= +%^^A Here is the docstrip installation file +%^^A It is written on first LaTeX run +%^^A ============================================= +\begin{filecontents}{natbib.ins} +% Simply TeX or LaTeX this file to extract various files from +% the source file `natbib.dtx' +% Comment out the \generateFile lines for any files you do not want. + +\def\batchfile{natbib.ins} +\input docstrip + +\preamble + +Only a few abbreviated comments remain here to describe the usage. + +\endpreamble +\postamble +<<<<< End of decommented file <<<<<< +\endpostamble +\keepsilent + +\generateFile{natbib.sty}{f}{\from{natbib.dtx}{package,all}} + +\preamble + +This is the LaTeX 2.09 version of the package. +It will not be maintained forever. +Please upgrade to LaTeX2e so that you may use the proper package. + +Only a few abbreviated comments remain here to describe the usage. + +\endpreamble + +% Activate the next line to get a version for running under LaTeX 2.09 +%\generateFile{natbib209.sty}{f}{\from{natbib.dtx}{package,all,209}} + +\preamble + +This is the driver file to produce the LaTeX documentation from the +source file \inFileName. +Make changes to it as needed. (Never change the \inFileName file!) +\endpreamble +\postamble + +End of documentation driver file. +\endpostamble + +% Activate the next line for a documentation driver +% that you can configure yourself. +%\generateFile{natbib.drv}{f}{\from{natbib.dtx}{driver}} + +\obeyspaces +\Msg{*******************************************}% +\Msg{* For documentation, process natbib.dtx *}% +\Msg{* or the driver file natbib.drv *}% +\Msg{* (LaTeX2e only!) *}% +\Msg{*******************************************} +\end{filecontents} +% +%<*driver> +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +%%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc} +%%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} +%%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc} +\raggedbottom + + %** To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out + %** the next line +\OnlyDescription + + %** To produce a command index: add the following line for one run, + %** then run makeindex -s gind.ist natbib + %** and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without) +%% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex + + %** To produce a change history: add the following line for one run, + %** then run makeindex -s gglo.ist -o natbib.gls natbib.glo + %** and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without) +%% \RecordChanges + +\DisableCrossrefs %May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineNumbered %May stay + +\begin{document} + \DocInput{natbib.dtx} +\end{document} +% +%\fi +% +% \DoNotIndex{\begin,\CodelineIndex,\CodelineNumbered,\def,\DisableCrossrefs} +% \DoNotIndex{\DocInput,\documentclass,\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\GetFileInfo} +% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\OnlyDescription,\RecordChanges,\usepackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage,\ProvidesFile,\RequirePackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\PassOptionsToClass,\PassOptionsToPackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareOption,\CurrentOption,\ProcessOptions,\ExecuteOptions} +% \DoNotIndex{\AtEndOfClass,\AtEndOfPackage,\AtBeginDocument,\AtEndDocument} +% \DoNotIndex{\InputIfFileExists,\IfFileExists,\ClassError,\PackageError} +% \DoNotIndex{\ClassWarning,\PackageWarning,\ClassWarningNoLine} +% \DoNotIndex{\PackageWarningNoLine,\ClassInfo,\PackageInfo,\MessageBreak} +% \DoNotIndex{\space,\protect,\DeclareRobustCommand,\CheckCommand} +% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\renewcommand,\providecommand,\newenvironment} +% \DoNotIndex{\renewenvironment,\newif,\newlength,\newcounter,\setlength} +% \DoNotIndex{\setcounter,\if,\ifx,\ifcase,\ifnum,\ifdim,\else,\fi} +% \DoNotIndex{\texttt,\textbf,\textrm,\textsl,\textsc,\reset@font} +% \DoNotIndex{\textup,\textit,\textmd,\textsf,\emph,\futurelet} +% \DoNotIndex{\ttfamily,\rmfamily,\sffamily,\mdseries,\bfseries,\upshape} +% \DoNotIndex{\slshape,\scshape,\itshape,\em,\LaTeX,\LaTeXe} +% \DoNotIndex{\filename,\fileversion,\filedate,\let,\makeindex} +% \DoNotIndex{\@auxout,\@for,\@gobble,\@ifnextchar,\@m,\@mkboth,\@nil} +% \DoNotIndex{\@noitemerr,\@tempa,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@warning} +% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\arabic,\AtBeginDocument,\bf,\bibname,\chapter} +% \DoNotIndex{\citation,\clubpenalty,\CodelineNumbered,\csname} +% \DoNotIndex{\DisableCrossrefs,\do,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endlist} +% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\gdef,\global,\hbox,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace} +% \DoNotIndex{\if,\if@filesw,\if@tempswa,\ifx,\immediate,\itemindent,\labelsep} +% \DoNotIndex{\labelwidth,\lastskip,\leftmargin,\list,\mbox,\newblock} +% \DoNotIndex{\newpage,\p@enumiv,\parindent,\penalty,\refname} +% \DoNotIndex{\relax,\section,\settowidth,\sfcode,\sloppy,\small,\string} +% \DoNotIndex{\theenumiv,\thepage,\unskip,\uppercase,\usecounter,\vskip} +% \DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@,\catcode,\ifnum,\the} +% \DoNotIndex{\.,\@empty,\@ifundefined,\@latex@warning,\@minus,\@plus,\ } +% \DoNotIndex{\document,\@namedef,\@listi} +% \DoNotIndex{\listparindent,\noexpand,\par,\parsep,\pb,\pbf,\pbfseries} +% \DoNotIndex{\pc,\pd,\pem,\pit,\pitshape,\pmdseries,\prm,\prmfamily,\psc} +% \DoNotIndex{\pscshape,\psf,\psffamily,\psl,\pslshape,\ptt,\pttfamily} +% \DoNotIndex{\pupshape,\@iden,\@firstofone,\@unexpandable@protect} +% \DoNotIndex{\&,\{,\},\bibitem,\bibindent,\if@draft,\typeout} +% \DoNotIndex{\@ifclassloaded,\@ifstar,\@onlypreamble,\@preamblecmds} +% \DoNotIndex{\addtolength,\endinput,\@bsphack,\begingroup,\@wrindex} +% \DoNotIndex{\@listctr,\bibname,\enddocument,\hfil,\ignorespaces,\item} +% \DoNotIndex{\NAT@temp,\refname,\stepcounter,\@ifpackageloaded} +% \DoNotIndex{\@gobbletwo,\index,\itemsep,\markright,\scriptsize} +% \DoNotIndex{\textsuperscript} +% +% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} +% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm} +% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} +% +% \hyphenation{par-en-the-ti-cal} +% +% \GetFileInfo{natbib} +% +% \title{{\bfseries Natural Sciences Citations and References}\\ +% (Author--Year and Numerical Schemes)} +% +% \author{Patrick W. Daly} +% +% \date{This paper describes package \texttt{\filename}\\ +% version \fileversion{} from \filedate\\[1ex] +%^^A \textsl{It is part of the \texttt{preprint} collection of packages}\\ +% \textbf{It is intended for \LaTeXe} +% \\ (but does include a variant for \LaTeX~2.09) +% } +% +% \maketitle +% +% \pagestyle{myheadings} +% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{NATURAL SCIENCES CITATIONS AND REFERENCES} +% +% \newcommand{\btx}{\textsc{Bib}\TeX} +% \newcommand{\thestyle}{\texttt{\filename}} +% +%^^A In order to keep all marginal notes on the one (left) side: +%^^A (otherwise they switch sides disasterously with twoside option) +% \makeatletter \@mparswitchfalse \makeatother +% +% \begin{abstract} +% Journals in the natural sciences tend to use the author--year style of +% literature citations, in contrast to the numerical style supported by +% \LaTeX{} and \btx. A number of contributed packages exist to accommodate this +% citation mode, but each one is tailored to a limited number of \btx\ style +% (\texttt{.bst} files. The reason is that each one reads in the author--year +% information in different formats for the |\bibitem| commands. +% In contrast, +% the \thestyle{} package supports not only the various author--year +% bibliography styles, but also those for standard numerical citations. In +% fact, it can also produce numerical citations even with an author--year +% bibliographic style, something that permits easy switching between the +% two citation modes. To this end, replacements for the standard +% \LaTeX\ \texttt{.bst} files are also provided. +% +% It is possible to define the citation \emph{style} (type of brackets and +% punctuation between citations) and even to associate it with the name of the +% bibliographic style so that it is automatically activated. Citation styles +% can be defined for local \texttt{.bst} files by means of a configuration file +% \thestyle\texttt{.cfg}. +% +% It is compatible with the packages: \texttt{index}, \texttt{showkeys}, +% \texttt{chapterbib}, \texttt{hyperref}, +% and with the classes \texttt{amsbook} and +% \texttt{amsart}. It can also emulate the sorting and compressing +% functions of the \texttt{cite} package (with which it is otherwise +% incompatible). +% +% The \thestyle\ package therefore acts as a single, flexible interface for +% most of the available bibliographic styles. +% +% \end{abstract} +% +% \section{Introduction} +% The first problem of using author--year literature citations with standard +% \LaTeX{} is that the two forms of citations are not supported. These are: +% \begin{quote} +% textual: \dots\ as shown by Jones et al. (1990) \dots\\ +% parenthetical: It has been shown (Jones et al., 1990) that \dots +% \end{quote} +% There is only one |\cite| command to do both jobs. +% +% A second problem is that the \texttt{thebibliography} environment for +% listing the references insists on including the {\em labels\/} in the +% list. These labels are normally the numbers, needed for referencing. In +% the author--year system, they are superfluous and should be left off. +% Thus, if one were to make up a bibliography with the author--year as +% label, as +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{thebibliography}{...} +% \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{jon90} +% Jones, P. K., . . . +% \end{thebibliography} +% \end{verbatim} +% \end{quote} +% then |\cite{jon90}| produces the parenthetical citation [Jones et al., +% 1990], but there is no way to get the textual citation. Furthermore, +% the citation text will also be included in the list of references. +% +% The final problem is to find a \btx{} bibliography style that will be +% suitable. +% +% \section{Previous Solutions} +% \begin{quote}\slshape +% This section may not be of interest to all users. To find out how to use +% \thestyle\ without reading about the historical background, go to +% Section~\ref{sec:usage}. +% \end{quote} +% +% Although the author--year citation mode is not supported by +% \emph{standard} \LaTeX, there are a number of contributed packages that +% try to solve this problem. The various bibliographic styles +% (\texttt{.bst} files) that exist are usually tailored to be used with a +% particular \LaTeX{} package. +% +% I have found a large number of \texttt{.bst} files on file servers that may +% act as indicators of the various systems available. +% +% \subsection{The \texttt{natsci.bst} Style} +% What gave me my first inspiration was Stephen Gildea's \texttt{natsci.bst} +% for use with his \texttt{agujgr.sty} file. This showed me that the problem +% was solvable. However, Gildea's style formats |\bibitem| just as I +% illustrated above: with an optional label consisting of abbreviated +% authors and year. Thus only parenthetical citations can be accommodated. +% The list of references, however, is fixed up in his style files. +% +% \subsection{The \texttt{apalike.bst} Style} +% Oren Patashnik, the originator of \btx{} and the standard \texttt{.bst} +% files, has also worked on an author--year style, called \texttt{apalike.bst} +% with a corresponding \texttt{apalike.sty} to support it. Again, only the +% parenthetical citation is provided. Except for the fact that his style +% works with version~0.99 of \btx, its functionality is identical to that +% of the \texttt{natsci} files. +% +% Patashnik does not like author--year citations. He makes this very clear +% in his \btx{} manuals and in the header to \texttt{apalike.bst}. +% Nevertheless, one should respect his work in this area, simply because he +% should be the best expert on matters of \btx. Thus \texttt{apalike.bst} +% could be the basis for other styles. +% +% The form of the \texttt{thebibliography} entries in this system is +% \begin{quote} +% |\bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{jon90}...| +% \end{quote} +% the same as I illustrated earlier. This is the most minimal form that can +% be given. I name it the \texttt{apalike} variant, after Patashnik's +% \texttt{apalike.bst} and \texttt{apalike.sty}. However, there could be many +% independent \texttt{.bst} files that follow this line. +% +% The bibliography style files belonging to this group include: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{apalike}, \texttt{apalike2}, \texttt{cea}, \texttt{cell}, +% \texttt{jmb}, \texttt{phapalik}, \texttt{phppcf}, \texttt{phrmp} +% \end{quote} +% +% \subsection{The \texttt{newapa} Style} +% A major improvement has been achieved with \texttt{newapa.bst} and the +% accompanying \texttt{newapa.sty} files by Stephen N. Spencer and Young U. +% Ryu. Under their system, three separate items of information are included +% in the |\bibitem| label, to be used as required. These are: the full +% author list, the abbreviated list, and the year. This is accomplished by +% means of a |\citeauthoryear| command included in the label, as +% \begin{quote} +% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Barker,|\\ +% | and Williams}{Jones et al.}{1990}]{jon90}...| +% \end{quote} +% Actually, this only illustrates the basic structure of |\citeauthoryear|; +% the \texttt{newapa} files go even further to replace some words and +% punctuation +% with commands. For example, the word `and' above is really +% |\betweenauthors|, something that must be defined in the \texttt{.sty} file. +% Of course, |\citeauthoryear| is also defined in that file. A +% number of different |\cite| commands are available to print out the +% citation with complete author list, with the short list, with or without +% the date, the textual or parenthetical form. +% +% Thus the |\citeauthoryear| entry in |\bibitem| is very flexible, +% permitting the style file to generate every citation form that one might +% want. It is used by a number of other styles, with corresponding +% \texttt{.sty} files. They all appear to have been inspired by +% \texttt{newapa.bst}, although they lack the extra punctuation commands. +% +% Bibliographic style files belonging to the \texttt{newapa} group include +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{newapa}, \texttt{chicago}, \texttt{chicagoa}, \texttt{jas99}, +% \texttt{named} +% \end{quote} +% Note: the last of these, \texttt{named.bst}, uses |\citeauthoryear| in a +% slightly different manner, with only two arguments: the short list and +% year. +% +% \subsection{The Harvard Family} +% The same effect is achieved by a different approach in the Harvard family +% of bibliographic styles. Here a substitute for |\bibitem| is used, as +% \begin{quote} +% |\harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and|\\ +% | Williams}{1990}{jon90}...| +% \end{quote} +% The accompanying interface package file is called \texttt{harvard.sty} +% and is written by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier. It +% defines |\harvarditem| as well as the citation commands |\cite|, for +% parenthentical, and |\citeasnoun|, for textual citations. The first +% citation uses the long author list, following ones the shorter list, if +% it has been given in the optional argument to |\harvarditem|. +% +% Bibliography styles belonging to the Harvard family are +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{agsm}, \texttt{dcu}, \texttt{kluwer} +% \end{quote} +% +% This package has been updated for \LaTeXe, with many additions to +% add flexibility. The result is a powerful interface that should meet most +% citation needs. (It does not suppress repeated authors, though, +% as \thestyle{} does.) +% +% \subsection{The Astronomy Style} +% Apparently realizing the limitations of his \texttt{apalike} system, Oren +% Patashnik went on to develop a `true' \texttt{apa} bibliographic style, +% making use of the method already employed by an astronomy journal. This +% is actually very similar to the \texttt{newapa} label but with only the +% short list of authors: +% \begin{quote} +% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{jon90}|\\ +% | ...| +% \end{quote} +% It requires the package file \texttt{astron.sty} +% or any other style that defines |\astroncite| appropriately. +% +% Bibliographic styles belonging to the astronomy group are +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{apa}, \texttt{astron}, \texttt{bbs}, \texttt{cbe}, +% \texttt{humanbio}, \texttt{humannat}, \texttt{jtb} +% \end{quote} +% +% This is as good as the |\citeauthoryear| command, although not as +% flexible since the full list of authors is missing. +% +% \subsection{The \texttt{authordate} Style} +% Finally, I have also found some packages making use of a label command +% called |\citename| in the form +% \begin{quote} +% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al., }1990]{jon90}|\\ +% | ...| +% \end{quote} +% +% This is not a good system since the author list and date are not cleanly +% separated as individual arguments, and since the punctuation is included +% in the label text. It is better to keep the punctuation fully removed, as +% part of the definitions in the \texttt{.sty} file, for complete flexibility. +% +% Bibliographic styles belonging to this group are +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{authordate1}, \texttt{authordate2}, \texttt{authordate3}, +% \texttt{authordate4}, \texttt{aaai-named} +% \end{quote} +% with accompanying style file \texttt{authordate1-4.sty}. +% +% \section{The \thestyle{} System} +% The form of the |\bibitem| entry that I have used for all my +% bibliographic styles is only slightly more complicated than the minimal +% one, but allows a clean separation between authors and date: +% \begin{quote} +% |\bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{jon90}...|\\[1ex] +% or alternatively\\[1ex] +% |\bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, |\\ +% \hspace*{2em}|and Williams]{jon90}...| +% \end{quote} +% +% (One weakness of the \thestyle{} format is that it fails if the author +% list itself contains parentheses! This may be fixed up if the author list +% is grouped in curly braces.) +% +% I wanted to name the system something like `natural sciences bibliography', +% intending it to be a variant of \texttt{natsci.sty}. Since that name +% was already taken, I resorted to the rather cryptic, and definitely ugly, +% \thestyle. +% +% The \thestyle\texttt{.sty} package\footnote{Formerly called a \emph{style +% file} in the older \LaTeX~2.09 terminology.} +% supports not only my own |\bibitem| format, but +% also all the others described here, plus numerical citation modes. +% The additional questions of citation style (type of brackets, commas or +% semi-colons between citations) can be defined once and for all for each +% \texttt{.bst} file and need never be specified explicitly in the source text. +% The use of |\cite| is the same for all citation styles, meaning that the +% additional features that might be available in the `proper' \texttt{.sty} +% file will be missing. (This could be changed later.) The result is a +% single \LaTeX{} package to handle {\em all\/} the bibliographic +% styles in a uniform manner. +% +% As of version 5.1 (1994 June 22), the source file contains coding for a +% \LaTeXe{} package file (the new standard) as well as that for an older +% \LaTeX~2.09 style option file. The latter is extracted with the +% \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{209}. +% +% \begin{quote}\slshape +% \textbf{New to version 6.0}: (1995 Sep 29) \\ +% In previous versions, each \texttt{.bst} file was either numerical or +% author--year only. Applying the wrong mode led to grotesque results, and +% the mode could not always be selected automatically. With version~6.0, +% all the author--year bibliographic style files can also be used for +% \emph{numerical} citations, by simply selecting the mode in one of the +% ways described in Sections~\ref{sec:bibpunct} and \ref{sec:opts}. It is +% not possible to employ author-year citations with pure numerical +% \texttt{.bst} files, and never will be. +% +% See Section~\ref{sec:6.0} for more information. +% \end{quote} +% +% \section{Using this Package}\label{sec:usage} +% +% In this paper, I distinguish between the citation \emph{mode} (author--year +% or numerical) and citation \emph{style} (the type of punctuation used for +% citations). The citation style is something that is independent of the +% bibliography style and is not programmed in the \texttt{.bst} files. +% +% \subsection{Basic Citation Commands} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citet} +% \DescribeMacro{\citep} +% The \thestyle{} package has two basic citation commands, |\citet| and +% |\citep| for \emph{textual} and \emph{parenthetical} citations, respectively. +% There also exist the starred versions |\citet*| and |\citep*| that print +% the full author list, and not just the abbreviated one. +% All of these may take one or two optional arguments to add some text before +% and after the citation. +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad$\Rightarrow$\quad}l} +% |\citet{jon90}| & Jones et al. (1990)\\ +% |\citet[chap.~2]{jon90}| & Jones et al. (1990, chap.~2)\\[0.5ex] +% |\citep{jon90}| & (Jones et al., 1990)\\ +% |\citep[chap.~2]{jon90}| & (Jones et al., 1990, chap.~2)\\ +% |\citep[see][]{jon90}| & (see Jones et al., 1990)\\ +% |\citep[see][chap.~2]{jon90}| & (see Jones et al., 1990, chap.~2)\\[0.5ex] +% |\citet*{jon90}| & Jones, Baker, and Williams (1990)\\ +% |\citep*{jon90}| & (Jones, Baker, and Williams, 1990) +% \end{tabular} +% \end{quote} +% The starred versions can only list the full authors if the \texttt{.bst} +% file supports this feature; otherwise, the abbreviated list is printed. +% +% In standard \LaTeX, the |\cite| command can only take a single optional +% text for a note after the citation; here, a single optional text is a +% post-note, while two are the pre- and post-note. To have only a pre-note, it +% is necessary to provide an empty post-note text, as shown above. +% +% Multiple citations may be made as usual, by including more than one +% citation key in the |\cite| command argument. \textsl{If adjacent citations +% have the same author designation but different years, then the author +% names are not reprinted.} +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad$\Rightarrow$\quad}l} +% |\citet{jon90,jam91}| & Jones et al. (1990); James et al. (1991)\\ +% |\citep{jon90,jam91}| & (Jones et al., 1990; James et al. 1991)\\ +% |\citep{jon90,jon91}| & (Jones et al., 1990, 1991)\\ +% |\citep{jon90a,jon90b}| & (Jones et al., 1990a,b) +% \end{tabular} +% \end{quote} +% +% These examples are for author--year citation mode. In numerical mode, the +% results are different. +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad$\Rightarrow$\quad}l} +% |\citet{jon90}| & Jones et al. [21]\\ +% |\citet[chap.~2]{jon90}| & Jones et al. [21, chap.~2]\\[0.5ex] +% |\citep{jon90}| & [21]\\ +% |\citep[chap.~2]{jon90}| & [21, chap.~2]\\ +% |\citep[see][]{jon90}| & [see 21, 1990]\\ +% |\citep[see][chap.~2]{jon90}| & [see 21, chap.~2]\\[0.5ex] +% |\citep{jon90a,jon90b}| & [21, 32] +% \end{tabular} +% \end{quote} +% The authors can only be listed if the \texttt{.bst} file supports +% author--year citations. The standard \texttt{.bst} files, such as +% \texttt{plain.bst} are numerical only and transfer no author--year +% information to \LaTeX. In this case, |\citet| prints ``\textbf{(author?)} +% [21].'' +% +% {\slshape Do not use multiple citations with the |\citet| command in +% numerical mode!} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\cite} +% In the original versions of \thestyle, the traditional |\cite| command was +% used for both textual and parenthetical citations. The presence of an empty +% optional text in square brackets signaled parenthetical. This syntax has been +% retained for compatibility, but is no longer encouraged. +% +% This means that |\cite| (without notes) is the same as |\citet| in +% author--year mode, whereas in numerical mode, it is the same as |\citep|. +% The starred version, as well as the one or two optional notes, may also be +% used. +% +% \subsection{Extended Citation Commands} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citealt} +% As an alternative form of citation, |\citealt| is the same as |\citet| +% but \emph{without any parentheses}. Multiple references and the +% starred variant also exist. +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad$\Rightarrow$\quad}l} +% |\citealt{jon90}| & Jones et al. 1990\\ +% |\citealt*{jon90}| & Jones, Baker, and Williams 1990\\ +% |\citealt{jon90,jam91}| & Jones et al. 1990; James et al. 1991 +% \end{tabular} +% \end{quote} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citeauthor} +% \DescribeMacro{\citeyear} +% \DescribeMacro{\citefullauthor} +% In author--year schemes, it is sometimes desirable to be able to refer to +% the authors without the year, or vice versa. This is provided with three +% extra commands +% \begin{quote} +% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad$\Rightarrow$\quad}l} +% |\citeauthor{jon90}| & Jones et al.\\ +% |\citefullauthor{jon90}| & Jones, Baker, and Williams\\ +% |\citeyear{jon90}| & 1990 +% \end{tabular} +% \end{quote} +% If the full author information is missing, then |\citefullauthor| is +% the same as |\citeauthor|, printing only the abbreviated list. +% This also applies to the starred versions of |\citet| and |\citep|. +% +% If the author or year information is missing (as is the case with the +% standard \LaTeX{} \texttt{.bst} files), these commands issue a warning. +% +% As of version~6.0, these commands may also be used with numerical +% citations, provided an author--year \texttt{.bst} file is being employed. +% +% The native \thestyle{} form of the |\bibitem| entry now +% also supports the full author list. +% +% \textsl{Multiple citations are \emph{not} allowed with these commands.} +% +% \subsection{Selecting Citation Punctuation}\label{sec:bibpunct} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibpunct} +% The above examples have been printed with the default citation style. +% It is possible to change this, as well as to select numerical or +% author--year mode, by means of the |\bibpunct| command, which takes +% one optional and 6 mandatory arguments. The mandatory ones are: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the opening bracket symbol, default = ( +% \item the closing bracket symbol, default = ) +% \item the punctuation between multiple citations, default = ; +% \item the letter `n' for numerical style, or `s' for numerical superscript +% style, any other letter for +% author--year, default = author--year; note, it is not necessary to +% specify which author--year interface is being used, for all will be +% recognized; +% \item the punctuation that comes between the author names and the year +% (parenthetical case only), default = , +% \item the punctuation that comes between years when common author lists +% are suppressed (default = ,); if both authors and years are common, +% the citation is printed as `1994a,b', but if a space is wanted between +% the extra letters, then include the space in the argument, as |{,~}|. +% \end{enumerate} +% +% The optional argument is the character preceding a post-note, default is a +% comma. +% +% The |\bibpunct| command must be issued in the preamble, that is, +% before |\begin{document}|. (\textbf{Note:} in versions 5.4 or earlier, this +% declaration had to be given after the preamble!) +% +% Example~1, |\bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{a}{}{;}| changes the output of +% \begin{quote} +% |\citep{jon90,jon91,jam92}| +% \end{quote} +% into [Jones et al. 1990; 1991, James et al. 1992]. +% +% Example~2, |\bibpunct[;]{(}{)}{,}{a}{}{;}| changes the output of +% \begin{quote} +% |\citep[and references therein]{jon90}| +% \end{quote} +% into (Jones et al. 1990; and references therein). +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibstyle@xxx} +% Usually the citation style is determined by the journal +% for which one is writing, and is as much a part of the bibliography style +% as everything else. The \thestyle{} package allows +% punctuation definitions to be directly coupled to the +% |\bibliographystyle| command that must always be present when \btx{} is +% used. It is this command that selects the \texttt{.bst} file; by adding such +% a coupling to \thestyle{} for every \texttt{.bst} file that one might +% want to use, it is not necessary to add |\bibpunct| explicitly in the +% document itself, unless of course one wishes to override the preset +% values. +% +% Such a coupling is achieved by defining a command |\bibstyle@|{\em bst}, +% where {\em bst\/} stands for the name of the \texttt{.bst} file. For example, +% the American Geophysical Union (AGU) demands in its publications that +% citations be made with square brackets and separated by semi-colons. I +% have an \texttt{agu.bst} file to accomplish most of the formatting, but such +% punctuations are not included in it. Instead, \thestyle{} has the +% definition +% \begin{quote} +% |\newcommand{\bibstyle@agu}{\bibpunct{[}{]}{;}{a}{,}{,~}}| +% \end{quote} +% +% These style defining commands may contain more than just |\bibpunct|. +% Some numerical citation scheme require even more changes. For example, +% the journal \textsl{Nature} not only uses superscripted numbers for +% citations, it also prints the numbers in the list of references without +% the normal square brackets. To +% accommodate this, \thestyle{} contains the style definition +% \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} +% \newcommand{\bibstyle@nature}{\bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{}% +% \gdef\NAT@biblabelnum##1{##1.}} +% \end{verbatim} +% \end{quote} +% The redefined |\NAT@biblabelnum| command specifies how the reference numbers +% are to be formatted in the list of references itself. +% The redefinition must be made with |\gdef|, not |\def| or +% |\renewcommand|. +% +% The selected punctuation style and other redefinitions will not be in +% effect on the first \LaTeX{} run, for they are stored to the auxiliary +% file for the subsequent run. +% +% The user may add more such definitions of his own, to accommodate those +% journals and \texttt{.bst} files that he has. He may either add them to +% his local copy of \thestyle\texttt{.sty}, or better put them into a file +% named \thestyle\texttt{.cfg}. This file will be read in if it exists, +% adding any local configurations. Thus such configurations can survive +% future updates of the package. (This is for \LaTeXe{} only.) +% +% \medskip +% \noindent\textbf{Note:} +% with version~6.0, any explicit call to |\bibpunct| has priority over the +% predefined citation styles. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citestyle} +% A preprogrammed citation style is normally invoked by the command +% |\bibliographystyle|, as described above. However, it may be that +% one wants to apply a certain citation style to another bibliography +% style. This may be done with |\citestyle|, given \emph{before} +% |\begin{document}|. For example, to use the +% \texttt{plain} bibliography style (for the list of references) with the +% \textsl{Nature} style of citations (superscripts), +% \begin{quote} +% |\documentclass{article}|\\ +% |\usepackage{|\thestyle|}|\\ +% |. . . . .|\\ +% |\citestyle{nature}|\\ +% |\begin{document}|\\ +% |\bibliographystyle{plain}|\\ +% |. . . . .| +% \end{quote} +% +% \noindent +% \textbf{Note:} for versions 5.5 and later, all changes to the citation +% style, including punctuation, must be made before |\begin{document}|, +% which freezes the citation style. +% +% \subsection{Priority of Style Commands}\label{sec:priority} +% The citation style (punctuation and mode) can be selected by means of the +% |\bibpunct|, |\citestyle|, and predefined |\bibstyle@|\textit{bst} +% commands. They can also be selected by \LaTeXe{} options +% (Section~\ref{sec:opts}). What happens if there are several conflicting +% selections? +% +% The lowest priority is assigned to the predefined |\bibstyle@|\textit{bst} +% commands, since they are implicit and not obvious to the user. The +% \LaTeXe{} options have the next priority. Finally, any selection by +% |\bibpunct| and/or |\citestyle| overrides those of the other methods. +% +% \subsection{Other Formatting Options} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibsection} +% The list of references normally appears as a |\section*| or |\chapter*|, +% depending on the main class. If one wants to redesign one's own heading, +% say as a numbered section with |\section|, then |\bibsection| may be +% redefined by the user accordingly. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibfont} +% The list of references is normally printed in the same font size and +% style as the main body. However, it is possible to define |\bibfont| +% to be font commands that are in effect within the \texttt{thebibliography} +% environment. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibhang} +% The list of references for author--year styles uses a hanging indentation +% format: the first line of each reference is flush left, the following lines +% are set with an indentation from the left margin. This indentation is 1~em +% by default but may be changed by redefining (with |\setlength|) the +% length parameter |\bibhang|. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\bibsep} +% The vertical spacing between references in the list, whether author--year +% or numerical, is controlled by the length |\bibsep|. If this is set to +% 0~pt, there is no extra line spacing between references. The default +% spacing depends on the font size selected in |\documentclass|, and is +% almost a full blank line. Change this by redefining |\bibsep| with +% |\setlength| command. +% +% \subsection{Automatic Indexing of Citations} +% +% (New to version 6.0; applies to \LaTeXe\ only)\\[1ex] +% \DescribeMacro{\citeindextrue} +% \DescribeMacro{\citeindexfalse} +% If one wishes to have the citations entered in the \texttt{.idx} indexing +% file, it is only necessary to issue |\citeindextrue| at any point in the +% document. All following |\cite| commands, of all variations, then insert +% the corresponding entry to that file. With |\citeindexfalse|, these +% entries will no longer be made. +% +% The |\bibitem| commands in the \texttt{thebibliography} environment will +% also make index entries. If this is not desired, then issue +% |\citeindexfalse| before |\bibliography| or |\begin{thebibliography}|. +% +% Of course, |\makeindex| must also be issued in the preamble to activate +% indexing, as usual. Otherwise, no indexing is done at all. +% +% Make sure that the document has been processed at least twice after the +% last \btx\ run before running the \texttt{makeindex} program. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\NAT@idxtxt} +% The form of the index entries is set by the internal |\NAT@idxtxt|, which +% can be redefined by hackers if wanted (in the \thestyle\texttt{.cfg} file +% please). By default, it prints the short author list plus date in the +% current parenthesis style. +% +% The \thestyle\ package can also be used with the \texttt{index} package of +% David~M. Jones. The order in which the packages are loaded is not +% important. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citeindextype} +% In that package, multiple index lists may be made by means of a |\newindex| +% command. For example, it may be desirable to put all the citation indexing +% into a separate list. First that list must be initiated with, e.g., +% \begin{quote} +% |\newindex{cite}{ctx}{cnd}{List of Citations}| +% \end{quote} +% and then the automatic citation indexing associated with this list with the +% \thestyle\ command +% \begin{quote} +% |\renewcommand{\citeindextype}{cite}| +% \end{quote} +% See the documentation for \texttt{index.sty} for details. +% +% \subsection{Hyper\TeX\ Compatibility} +% As of version~6.4, \thestyle\ is compatible with the \texttt{hyperref} +% package of Sebastian Rahtz and Yannis Haralambous, for use with +% Hyper\TeX. The compatibility is of a mutual nature: both packages contain +% coding that interact with that of the other. Thus the version of +% \texttt{hyperref} must be more recent than 1996 Oct~8. +% ^^A Update the date when it is better known, after checking with Rahtz. +% +% \subsection{Multiple Bibliographies in One Document}\label{sec:chapbib} +% +% As of version 6.4, \thestyle\ is compatible with the \texttt{chapterbib} +% package of Donald Arseneau and Niel Kempson,\relax +% \footnote{I have used version 1.5 from 1995/10/09; cannot guarantee +% earlier versions.} +% which makes it possible to have several +% bibliographies in one document. The usual application is to have +% bibliographies in each chapter of a book, especially if they have been +% written by different authors. +% +% The \texttt{chapterbib} package works in a very natural way for the +% author; only the editor who puts all the chapters together into one book +% has to do some extra work. +% +% The package makes use of the |\include| command, and it is in fact every +% |\include|d file that has its own bibliography. For large books, it makes +% very good sense to take advantage of this feature in any case. +% +% To review the use of |\include|, recall that the main file +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass{...} +% \includeonly{ch2} +% \begin{document} +% \include{ch1} +% \include{ch2} +% \include{ch3} +% \end{document} +% \end{verbatim} +% will process only the file \texttt{ch2.tex} as though the files +% \texttt{ch1.tex} and \texttt{ch3.tex} were also present. That is, all +% counters, especially the page and section numbers, as well as +% cross-referencing definitions, will function as if the whole document +% were processed. The trick is that each |\include|d file has it own +% \texttt{.aux} file containing these definitions, and they are all read +% in every time, even if the corresponding \texttt{.tex} file is not. The +% \texttt{.aux} files also contain the citation information for \btx, +% something that the \texttt{chapterbib} package exploits. +% +% If |\usepackage{chapterbib}| has been given, the keys in each |\cite| +% and |\bibitem| command are associated with the current |\include|d file +% and are distinguished from the identical key in a different file. Each of +% these files must contain its own |\bibliography| and |\bibliographystyle| +% commands. One processes \btx\ on each file separately before processing +% it under \LaTeX\ (at least twice). +% +% \subsubsection{Special Considerations for \thestyle\ and +% \texttt{chapterbib}} +% +% The order in which the \texttt{chapterbib} and \thestyle\ packages are loaded +% is unimportant. +% +% The \texttt{chapterbib} package provides an option \texttt{sectionbib} +% that puts the bibliography in a |\section*| instead of |\chapter*|, +% something that makes sense if there is a bibliography in each chapter. +% This option will not work when \thestyle\ is also loaded; instead, add +% the option to \thestyle. (The \texttt{sectionbib} option can always be +% given, but it only has meaning for the \texttt{book} and \texttt{report} +% classes, or for classes derived from them.) +% +% Every |\include|d file (with citations) must contain its own +% |\bibliography| command where the bibliography is to appear. The database +% files listed as arguments to this command can be different in each file, +% of course. However, what is not so obvious, is that each file must also +% contain a |\bibliographystyle| command, \emph{preferably with the same +% style argument}. If different bibliography styles are specified for +% different files, then the preprogrammed citation style (punctuation and +% citation mode) will be that of the first bibliography style given. The +% preprogrammed citation styles can only be changed in the preamble (see +% Section~\ref{sec:priority}), something that guarantees a uniform style +% for the entire document.\relax +% \footnote{It would be relatively easy to allow changes in style anywhere +% in the document, but this strikes me as bad policy. However, it is +% provided for with the \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{nopreonly}.} +% +% \subsection{Sorting and Compressing Numerical Citations} +% +% Another package by Donald Arseneau, \texttt{cite.sty}, reimplements the +% entire (numerical) citation system such that one can control the +% punctuation and citation format, all of which is done by \thestyle\ as +% well. However, it also can sort and compress numerical citations, +% something that is required by some journals. +% +% What this means is that when multiple citations are given with a single +% |\cite| command, the normal order of the numbers is in the sequence +% given. This is usually a wild list of numbers, such as [4,2,8,3]. With +% the \texttt{cite} package, this list becomes [2--4,8]. +% +% It is impossible to make the \texttt{cite} and \thestyle\ packages +% compatible, since both reimplement |\cite| from scratch. Instead, I have +% taken the necessary coding from \texttt{cite.sty} and modified it for +% \thestyle{}. This coding becomes activated +% by including the option \texttt{sort} in the |\usepackage| command. +% It only affects numerical +% citations, and has no influence on the author--year ones. +% +% \section{Numerical Citations with Author--Year Styles}\label{sec:6.0} +% +% (New to version 6.0)\\[1ex] +% In earlier versions, each \texttt{.bst} file could be used either for +% numerical or author--year citation mode, without any possibility of +% switching. Obviously numerical \texttt{.bst} files can never be used for +% author--year citations (the information is missing in the auxiliary file) +% but there is no reason why the converse should not work. +% +% I have been frequently asked if I could implement this feature, and I at +% first replied that it would be quite easy. That was a mistake. The +% numerical information was missing in the auxiliary files, so the +% |\cite| commands could never access it. +% +% \subsection{New Coding} +% I have now recoded \thestyle{} so that the separation of author and year +% information comes before the information is written to the auxiliary +% file, and furthermore, a sequential number is also written. This permits +% numerical citations with \emph{any} of the author--year bibliographic style +% files. +% +% The recoding has made fewer internal changes than I expected. Any users +% who have local redefinitions of my internals should be aware that of the +% citation commands, only |\NAT@citexnum| has been altered. Otherwise the +% changes are in the parsing commands |\NAT@parse| and |\NAT@parse@date|. +% Of the external commands, |\bibitem| is completely redefined, and +% |\citeauthor|, |\citeyear|, and |\citefullauthor| are different. +% +% Version~5.5 actually made far more internal changes: all internal +% commands were renamed to conform to recommended \LaTeX{} coding +% practices. +% +% \subsection{Selecting Numerical Mode} +% By default, \thestyle{} is in author--year mode. This can be changed by +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item selecting a numerical bibliography style with predefined +% citation style, defined either in the package or in the local +% configuration file; +% +% \item giving options \texttt{numbers} or \texttt{super} to the +% |\usepackage| command; +% +% \item issuing |\bibpunct| with the 4th mandatory argument set to \texttt{n} +% or \texttt{s}; +% +% \item issuing |\citestyle| with the name of a predefined numerical +% bibliography style. +% \end{enumerate} +% The methods are listed in order of increasing priority. +% +% The \thestyle{} package will automatically switch to numerical mode if +% any one of the |\bibitem| entries fails to conform to the possible +% author--year formats. There is no way to override this, since such an +% entry would cause trouble in the author--year mode. +% +% There are certain special `numerical' styles, like that of the standard +% \texttt{alpha.bst}, which include a non-numerical label in place of the +% number, in the form +% \begin{quote} |\bibitem[ABC95]{able95}| \end{quote} +% As far as \thestyle\ is concerned, this label does not conform to the +% author--year possibilities and is therefore considered to be numerical. +% The citation mode switches to numerical, and |\cite{able95}| prints +% [ABC95]. +% +% \subsection{New Bibliography Styles} +% I provided three new \texttt{.bst} files to replace the standard \LaTeX\ +% numerical ones: +% \begin{quote}\ttfamily +% plainnat.bst \qquad abbrvnat.bst \qquad unsrtnat.bst +% \end{quote} +% These produce reference lists in the same style as the corresponding +% standard \texttt{.bst} file, but can only be used with \thestyle{}. The +% advantage is that they can be used in both numerical and author--year +% mode. +% +% In fact, \texttt{unsrtnat.bst} is rather silly for author--year +% citations: the references are listed in the order they were cited, which +% makes it difficult to find them. It is only included in case an author +% wishes to switch from \texttt{plainnat} (author--year) to the unsorted +% numerical mode, retaining the |\citeauthor| and |\citeyear| commands in +% his paper. +% +% It is not possible to produce a modified version of \texttt{alpha.bst} +% since it would conflict with the |\bibitem| format of \thestyle. +% +% The sample bibliography style file \texttt{natbib.bst} will no longer be +% distributed. It merely represented a demonstration of the |\bibitem| +% syntax for \thestyle, a function that is now taken over by +% \texttt{plainnat.bst} and friends. +% +% \section{Local Configuration} +% For \LaTeXe, it is possible to add a local configuration file +% \thestyle\texttt{.cfg}, which is read in, if it exists, at +% the end of the package. It may thus contain coding to supecede that in +% the package, although its main purpose is to allow the user to add his +% own |\bibstyle@|\textit{bst} definitions to couple citation punctuation +% with local bibliography styles. +% +% \section{Options with \LaTeXe}\label{sec:opts} +% One of the new features of \LaTeXe{} is \emph{options} for the packages, +% in the same way as main styles (now called \emph{classes}) can take +% options. This package is now installed with +% \begin{quote} +% |\documentclass[..]{...}|\\ +% |\usepackage[|\emph{options}|]{|\thestyle|}| +% \end{quote} +% The options available provide another means of specifying the +% punctuation for citations: +% \begin{description} +% \item[\ttfamily round] (default) for round parentheses; +% \item[\ttfamily square] for square brackets; +% \item[\ttfamily curly] for curly braces; +% \item[\ttfamily angle] for angle brackets; +% \item[\ttfamily colon] (default) to separate multiple citations with +% colons; +% \item[\ttfamily comma] to use commas as separaters; +% \item[\ttfamily authoryear] (default) for author--year citations; +% \item[\ttfamily numbers] for numerical citations; +% \item[\ttfamily super] for superscripted numerical citations, as in +% \textsl{Nature}; +% \item[\ttfamily sort] puts multiple numerical citations in order and +% compresses them if possible (as 3--6, 15); +% \item[\ttfamily sectionbib] redefines |\thebibliography| to issue +% |\section*| instead of |\chapter*|; valid only for classes with a +% |\chapter| command; to be used with the \texttt{chapterbib} package. +% \end{description} +% +% If any of these options are selected, the predefined citation styles in +% the commands |\bibstyle@|\textit{bst} will be no longer be effective. +% If either |\bibpunct| or |\citestyle| is given in the preamble, the above +% punctuation options will no longer hold. +% +% \section{As Module to Journal-Specific Styles} +% Although \thestyle{} is meant to be an all-purpose bibliographic style +% \emph{package}, it may also be incorporated as a module to other +% packages for specific journals. In this case, many of the general features may +% be left off. This is allowed for with \texttt{docstrip} options that not +% only leave off certain codelines, but also include extra ones. So far, +% options exist for +% \begin{description} +% \item[\ttfamily subpack] produces a basic version with author--year only, +% fixed citation punctuation, no |\bibpunct| nor |\citestyle| nor +% predefined styles; +% \item[\ttfamily subpack,egs] for journals of the \textsl{European Geophysical +% Society}, in particular \textsl{Nonlinear Processes in Geophysics}; +% \item[\ttfamily subpack,agu] for \textsl{American Geophysical Union} journals. +% \end{description} +% The \texttt{subpack} option must always be used with \texttt{package}. +% +% Previous options \texttt{jgr} and \texttt{grl} have become obsolete due +% to revisions in these journals; they have been replaced by the more +% general \texttt{agu} option. +% +% \section{Summary} +% +% The following summary is included as comments at the beginning of the +% \thestyle\texttt{.sty} file, for quick reference. Certain lines are +% dependent on the \texttt{docstrip} options. +% +% \iffalse +%<*package&!subpack> +% \fi +% \begin{verbatim} + % This package reimplements the LaTeX \cite command to be used for various + % citation styles, both author-year and numerical. It accepts BibTeX + % output intended for many other packages, and therefore acts as a + % general, all-purpose citation-style interface. + % + % With standard numerical .bst files, only numerical citations are + % possible. With an author-year .bst file, both numerical and + % author-year citations are possible. + % + % If author-year citations are selected, \bibitem must have one of the + % following forms: + % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}... + % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Williams]{key}... +%<*apalike|all> + % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}... +% +%<*newapa|chicago|all> + % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Williams}{Jones + % et al.}{1990}]{key}... + % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... +% +%<*astron|all> + % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... +% +%<*authordate|all> + % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al., }1990]{key}... +% +%<*harvard|all> + % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Williams}{1990}{key}... +% + % + % This is either to be made up manually, or to be generated by an + % appropriate .bst file with BibTeX. + % Author-year mode || Numerical mode + % Then, \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) || Jones et al. [21] + % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990) || [21] + % Multiple citations as normal: + % \citep{key1,key2} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990; Smith, 1989) || [21,24] + % or (Jones et al., 1990, 1991) || [21,24] + % or (Jones et al., 1990a,b) || [21,24] + % \cite{key} is the equivalent of \citet{key} in author-year mode + % and of \citep{key} in numerical mode + % Full author lists may be forced with \citet* or \citep*, e.g. + % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Williams, 1990) + % Optional notes as: + % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2) + % \citep[e.g.,][]{key} ==>> (e.g., Jones et al., 1990) + % \citep[see][pg. 34]{key}==>> (see Jones et al., 1990, pg. 34) + % (Note: in standard LaTeX, only one note is allowed, after the ref. + % Here, one note is like the standard, two make pre- and post-notes.) + % \citealt{key} ==>> Jones et al. 1990 + % \citealt*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Williams 1990 + % \citealt{key1,key2} ==>> Jones et al. 1990; Smith 1989 + % Additional citation possibilities (both author-year and numerical modes) + % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al. + % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990 + % \citefullauthor{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Williams + % (Multiple keys NOT allowed!) + % Note: full author lists depends on whether the bib style supports them; + % if not, the abbreviated list is printed even when full requested. + % + % Defining the citation style of a given bib style: +% % Use \bibpunct (in the preamble only) with 6 mandatory arguments: +% % Use \bibpunct (anywhere in the text) with 6 mandatory arguments: + % 1. opening bracket for citation + % 2. closing bracket + % 3. citation separator (for multiple citations in one \cite) + % 4. the letter n for numerical styles, s for superscripts + % else anything for author-year + % 5. punctuation between authors and date + % 6. punctuation between years when common authors missing + % One optional argument is the character coming before post-notes. It + % appears in square braces before all other arguments. May be left off. + % Example (and default) \bibpunct[,]{(}{)}{;}{a}{,}{,} + % + % To make this automatic for a given bib style, named newbib, say, make + % a local configuration file, natbib.cfg, with the definition + % \newcommand{\bibstyle@newbib}{\bibpunct...} + % Then the \bibliographystyle{newbib} will cause \bibstyle@newbib to + % be called on THE NEXT LATEX RUN (via the aux file). + % +% % Such preprogrammed definitions may be invoked in the text (preamble only) +% % Such preprogrammed definitions may be invoked anywhere in the text + % by calling \citestyle{newbib}. This is only useful if the style specified + % differs from that in \bibliographystyle. + % +%<*!209> + % With \citeindextrue and \citeindexfalse, one can control whether the + % \cite commands make an automatic entry of the citation in the .idx + % indexing file. For this, \makeindex must also be given in the preamble. + % + % LaTeX2e Options: (for selecting punctuation) + % round - round parentheses are used (default) + % square - square brackets are used [option] + % curly - curly braces are used {option} + % angle - angle brackets are used